ICOM orporated 339300 HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver User Manual manual draft ALL

ICOM Incorporated HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver manual draft ALL

UserManual.wiki >

ICOM orporated >

339300 User Manual HTML Version

User Manual

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER

i7100

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE

CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS

PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.

FOREWORD

Thank you for purchasing this ﬁ ne Icom product. The IC-7100

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER is designed and build with

Icom’s superior technology and craftsmanship combining tra-

ditional analog technologies with the new digital technology,

Digital Smart Technologies for Amateur Radio (D-STAR), for

a balanced package. With proper care, this product should

provide you with years of trouble-free operation.

We thank you for making your IC-7100 your radio of choice,

and hope you agree with Icom’s philosophy of “technology

ﬁ rst.” Many hours or research and development went into the

design of your IC-7100.

FEATURES

❍ IF DSP features

❍ All mode capability covering 160–2 m and

70 cm (depending on version)

❍ Compact with separated front panel

❍ ±0.5 ppm of high frequency stability

❍ Baudot RTTY demodulator

❍ Selectable SSB transmission passband

width (For both higher and lower pass

frequency)

❍ Standard voice synthesizer/voice recorder

❍ SD card slot ready for several memory

storage

❍ Voice recorder to records your

communication

❍ DV mode (Digital voice + Low-speed data

communication) operation-ready

– Text message and call sign exchange

– Transmit position data

❍ DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode and

repeater list allow you to easily operate

using a D-STAR repeater

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS

WORD DEFINITION

R DANGER! Personal death, serious injury or an

explosion may occur.

R WARNING! Personal injury, ﬁ re hazard or electric

shock may occur.

CAUTION Equipment damage may occur.

NOTE

Recommended for optimum use. No

risk of personal injury, ﬁ re or electric

shock.

IMPORTANT

READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS carefully and completely

before using the transceiver.

SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL— This

instruction manual contains important operating instructions

for the IC-7100.

FCC INFORMATION

• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This equipment gen-

erates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment

and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is connect-

ed.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered

trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the

United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, France,

Spain, Russia and/or other countries.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this

device, not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could

void your authority to operate this device under FCC

regulations.

PRECAUTIONS

R DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE! NEVER touch an

antenna or internal antenna connector during transmission.

This may result in an electrical shock or burn.

R WARNING RF EXPOSURE! This device emits

Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Extreme caution should

be observed when operating this device. If you have

any questions regarding RF exposure and safety stan-

dards please refer to the Federal Communications

Commission Ofﬁ ce of Engineering and Technology’s

report on Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines

for Human Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields

(OET Bulletin 65).

R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver while

driving a vehicle. Safe driving requires your full attention—

anything less may result in an accident.

R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver with

an earphone, headphones or other audio accessories

at high volume levels. Hearing experts advise against

continuous high volume operation. If you experience

a ringing in your ears, reduce the volume level or dis-

continue use.

R WARNING! NEVER apply AC power to the

[DC13.8V] connector on the transceiver rear panel. This

could cause a ﬁ re or damage the transceiver.

R WARNING! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC to the

[DC13.8V] connector on the transceiver rear panel or use

reverse polarity. This could cause a ﬁ re or damage the trans-

ceiver.

R WARNING! NEVER cut the DC power cable be-

tween the DC plug and fuse holder. If an incorrect connec-

tion is made after cutting, the transceiver might be dam-

aged.

R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other objects

touch any internal part or connectors on the rear panel of the

transceiver. This may result in an electric shock or this could

cause a ﬁ re or damage the transceiver.

R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the trans-

ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric

shock or may damage the transceiver.

R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver power

OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an abnormal

odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer or dis-

tributor for advice.

CAUTION: NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow

or any liquids.

CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings of

the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver perfor-

mance and/or damage to the transceiver.

DO NOT operate the transceiver near unshielded

electrical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere.

DO NOT use harsh solvents such as benzine or al-

cohol to clean the transceiver, as they will damage

the transceiver’s surfaces. If the transceiver becomes

dusty or dirty, wipe it clean with a soft, dry cloth.

DO NOT use or place the transceiver in areas with tem-

peratures below –10°C (+14°F) or above +60°C (+140°F).

Be aware that temperatures on a vehicle’s dashboard can

exceed +80°C (+176°F), resulting in permanent damage to

the transceiver if left there for extended periods.

DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty envi-

ronments or in direct sunlight.

DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or putting any-

thing on top of the transceiver. This will obstruct heat dissipa-

tion.

Place the transceiver in a secure place to avoid inadvertent

use by children.

During mobile operation, NEVER place the transceiver

where air bag deployment may be obstructed.

During mobile operation, DO NOT place the transceiver

where hot or cold air blows directly onto it.

During mobile operation, DO NOT operate the transceiver

without running the vehicle’s engine. When the transceiver’s

power is ON and your vehicle’s engine is OFF, the vehicle’s

battery will soon become exhausted.

Make sure the transceiver power is OFF before starting the

vehicle engine. This will avoid possible damage to the trans-

ceiver by ignition voltage spikes.

During maritime mobile operation, keep the transceiver and

microphone as far away as possible from the magnetic navi-

gation compass to prevent erroneous indications.

BE CAREFUL! The rear panel will become hot when op-

erating the transceiver continuously for long periods of time.

BE CAREFUL! If a linear ampliﬁ er is connected, set the

transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear ampli-

ﬁ er’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear ampliﬁ er will

be damaged.

Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional). Other

manufacturer’s microphones have different pin assignments,

and connection to the IC-7100 may damage the transceiver.

iii

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

The following accessories are supplied with the transceiver.

q Hand microphone ............................................... 1

w Control cable ....................................................... 1

e Ferrite bead .......................................................... 1

r 3.5 (d) mm plug .................................................... 1

t ACC cable ............................................................ 1

y DC power cable* (OPC-1457) ............................ 1

or (OPC-1457R) ......................... 1

u Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ......................................... 1

i USB cable ............................................................ 1

o CD ........................................................................ 1

!0 Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) ....................................... 2

* Depending on the version.

* Not supplied, or the shape is different, depending on the trans-

ceiver version.

qw e

io !0

Front panel (Controller)...........................................................1-2

Display D .....................................................................................1-8

Display D .....................................................................................1-9

Display D .....................................................................................1-10

Display D .....................................................................................1-11

M-1 (M-1 menu) Display D ..........................................................1-11

M-2 (M-2 menu) Display D ..........................................................1-11

M-3 (M-3 menu) Display D ..........................................................1-11

D-1 (D-1 menu) Display D ........................................................... 1-11

D-2 (D-2 menu) Display D ........................................................... 1-11

1-1

Section 1PANEL DESCRIPTION

Previous view

1-1

Previous view

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-2

Previous view

Front panel (Controller)

q POWER SWITCH/AF VOLUME [PWR]/[AF]

(p. 44)

Push to turn ON the transceiver power. ➥

• First, conﬁ rm the DC power source is turned ON.

Hold down for 1 second to turn OFF the power. ➥

Rotate to adjust audio output level. ➥

Increases

Decreases

w RF GAIN CONTROL/ SQUELCH CONTROL

[RF/SQL] (p. 44)

Rotate to adjust the RF gain and squelch threshold

level.

The squelch removes noise output to the speaker

when no signal is received. (closed condition)

• The squelch is particularly effective for AM and FM, but

also works in other modes.

• The 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for the most

effective use of the [RF/SQL] control.

• [RF/SQL] operates as only an RF gain control in SSB,

CW and RTTY (Squelch is ﬁ xed open), or a squelch con-

trol in AM, FM and DV (RF gain is ﬁ xed at maximum sen-

sitivity), when “Auto” is selected as the “RF/SQL Control”

item in the “Function” Set mode. (p. 162)

SET

> Function > RF/SQL Control

• When used as an RF gain/squelch control

Maximum

RF gain

S-meter

squelch

Noise squelch (FM/DV modes)

Squelch is

open.

RF gain

adjustable

range

Recommended level

• When used as an RF gain control

(Squelch is ﬁ xed open; SSB, CW and RTTY only)

Minimum RF gain

Adjustable

range

Maximum

RF gain

While rotating the RF gain control, a faint noise may

be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does

not indicate an equipment malfunction.

• When used as a squelch control

(RF gain is ﬁ xed at maximum.)

Squelch is

open.

S-meter

squelch

S-meter squelch

threshold

Noise squelch

threshold

(FM mode)

Shallow Deep

Noise squelch (FM/DV modes)

PBT RIT

TX / RX

PWR

AF RF/SQL

CLR

M-CH BANK

RIT

TUNER/CALL

MIC/RF PWR

SPEED/PITCH

SET

QUICK

NOTCH

AUTO

TUNE

➔

XFC

SPEECH

MPAD

P.AMP

ATT

i7100

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-3

Previous view

e TX/RX LED

Lights green when the squelch opens, or a signal ➥

is received.

Lights red during transmit. ➥

r MEMORY BANK CONTROL [BANK]

❍ When the both PBT and RIT LEDs are OFF

Rotate to select a Memory bank.

❍ When the PBT LED (y) rights green

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

Rotate to adjust the receiver’s IF ﬁ lter passband

width using the DSP circuit.

❍ When the RIT LED (u) rights orange

Disable this control.

t M-CH CONTROL/CLEAR KEY [M-CH]/[CLR]

Push to select the action of the [M-CH/BANK] con-

trols as the Memory/Bank selection, PBT control or

RIT control.

❍ When the both RIT and PBT LEDs are OFF

Rotate to select a Memory channel.

❍ When the RIT LED rights orange

➥ Rotate to adjust the RIT frequency shift.

• The frequency shift range is ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz

steps. The control tunes in 1 Hz steps when the

operating frequency readout is set to the 1 Hz step

readout.

➥ Hold down for 1 second to clear the RIT shift

frequency.

✔ What is the RIT function?

The RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the re-

ceive frequency without shifting the transmit frequency.

This is useful for ﬁ ne tuning stations calling you off-fre-

quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-

sounding voice characteristics, and so on.

❍ When the PBT LED rights green

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

➥ Rotate to adjust the receiver’s IF ﬁ lter pass-

band width using the DSP circuit.

➥

Hold down for 1 second to reset the PBT set-

tings.

• The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/

CW/RTTY modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode. In

this time, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps in

the SSB/CW/RTTY modes, and 100 Hz in the AM

mode.

• The PBT controls function as an IF shift control.

✔ What is the PBT control?

The PBT function electronically modiﬁ es the IF pass-

band width to reject interference. This transceiver uses

the DSP circuit for the PBT function.

y PBT LED

Lights green when the [M-CH/BANK] controls act

as the PBT control.

• Push the [M-CH] switch to select as the PBT control.

u RIT LED

Lights orange when the RIT function turns ON. ➥

Lights orange when the [M-CH/BANK] ➥ controls

act as the RIT control.

• Push the [M-CH] switch to select as the RIT con-

trol.

• The RIT control is the inner control. The outer control

is disabled.

i RIT KEY

RIT

(p. 69)

Push to turn the RIT function ON or OFF. ➥

• Use the [M-CH] control to vary the RIT frequency.

➥ Hold down for 1 second to add the shift frequency

of the RIT function to or subtract it from the dis-

played frequency.

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

PBT RIT

TX / RX

PWR

AF RF/SQL

CLR

M-CH BANK

RIT

TUNER/CALL

MIC/RF PWR

SPEED/PITCH

SET

QUICK

NOTCH

AUTO

TUNE

➔

XFC

SPEECH

MPAD

P.AMP

ATT

i7100

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-4

Previous view

o ANTENNA TUNER/CALL KEY

TUNER/CALL

❍ ANTENNA TUNER KEY Operation (p. 139)

(Frequency band: HF/50 MHz)

➥ Push to turn the optional antenna tuner ON or

OFF (bypass).

➥ Hold down for 1 second to manually start the

antenna tuner.

• If the tuner cannot tune the antenna within 20 sec-

onds, the tuning circuit is automatically bypassed.

❍ CALL KEY Operation (p. 139)

(Frequency band: 144/430 MHz)

Push to select the call channel.

!0 MENU SWITCH

(p. 19)

Push to change the set of functions assigned to

touch keys.

• Toggles the function display menu between M-1 (M-1

menu), M-2 (M-2 menu), M-3 (M-3 menu), D-1 (D-1

menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu).

!1 MIC GAIN/RF POWER ADJUSTMENT KEY

MIC/RF PWR

(p. 19)

Push to open the MIC gain/RF power adjustment

display.

• Rotate [M-CH] to adjust the MIC gain.

• Rotate [BANK] to adjust the RF power.

Frequency band RF output power range

HF/50 MHz 2 to 100 W (AM: 1 to 30 W)

144 MHz 2 to 100 W

430 MHz 2 to 75 W

• Push again to close the window.

!2 NOISE BLANKER KEY

(p. 76)

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

Push to turn the noise blanker ON or OFF. ➥

The noise blanker reduces pulse-type noise such

as that generated by vehicle ignition systems. The

noise blanker is not effective for non-pulse-type

noise.

• “NB” appears when the noise blanker is ON.

Hold down for 1 second to display the “NB” screen. ➥

Push to return to the previous screen.

!3 KEY SPEED/CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT KEY

SPEED/PITCH

(p. 19)

Push to open the Key speed/CW pitch adjustment

display.

• Rotate [M-CH] to adjust the keying speed of the inter-

nal electronic CW keyer to between 6 wpm (minimum)

and 48 wpm (maximum).

• Rotate [BANK] to shift the received CW audio pitch

and the CW sidetone pitch without changing the operat-

ing frequency.

• The CW pitch can be adjusted from 300 to 900 Hz in ap-

proximately 5 Hz steps.

• Push again to close the window.

!4 NOISE REDUCTION KEY

(p. 77)

Push to turn DSP noise reduction ON or OFF. ➥

• “NR” appears when noise reduction is ON.

Hold down for 1 second to display the “NR” screen. ➥

Push to return to the previous screen.

• Rotate the Dial to adjust the DSP noise reduction

level. Set for maximum readability.

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

PBT RIT

TX / RX

PWR

AF RF/SQL

CLR

M-CH BANK

RIT

TUNER/CALL

MIC/RF PWR

SPEED/PITCH

SET

QUICK

NOTCH

AUTO

TUNE

➔

XFC

SPEECH

MPAD

P.AMP

ATT

i7100

o!0 !2 !4!1 !3

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-5

Previous view

!5 PREAMP•ATTENUATOR KEY

P.AMP

ATT

❍ PREAMP KEY Operation (p. 71)

(Frequency band: HF/50 MHz)

Push to select one of two receive RF preampli-

ﬁ ers, or to bypass them.

• “P. AMP1” is a wide dynamic range preampliﬁ er. It is

most effective for the 1.8 to 21 MHz bands.

• “P. AMP2” is a high-gain preampliﬁ er. It is most effec-

tive for the 24 to 50 MHz bands.

• No indicator appears when the preampliﬁ ers are not

selected.

✔ What is the preampliﬁ er?

The preampliﬁ er ampliﬁ es signals in the front end

to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P.

AMP1” or “P. AMP2” when receiving weak sig-

nals.

(Frequency band: 144/430 MHz)

Push to turn the preampliﬁ er ON or OFF.

• “P.AMP” appears when the preampliﬁ er is ON.

❍ ATTENUATOR KEY Operation (p. 71)

➥ Hold down for 1 second to turn ON the attenu-

ator.

• “ATT” appears when the attenuator is ON.

➥ Push to turn OFF the attenuator.

• “ATT” disappears.

✔ What is the attenuator?

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from be-

ing distorted when very strong signals are near it,

or when very strong electromagnetic ﬁ elds, such

as from a broadcasting station, are near your lo-

cation.

!6 NOTCH SWITCH

NOTCH

(p. 77)

(Mode = Auto notch: SSB/AM/FM

Manual notch: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

➥In the SSB and AM modes, push to toggle the

notch function between auto, manual and OFF.

• Either the Auto or Manual notch function can be turned

OFF in

the “[NOTCH] Switch (SSB)/(AM)” items

of the

“Function” Set mode. (p. 36)

SET

> Function > [NOTCH] Switch (SSB)

SET

> Function > [NOTCH] Switch (AM)

➥In the FM mode, push to turn the Auto Notch func-

tion ON or OFF.

➥ In the CW or RTTY mode, push to turn the Manual

Notch function ON or OFF.

• “MN” appears when the Manual Notch function is

ON.

• “AN” appears when the Auto Notch function is ON.

• No indicator appears when the notch ﬁ lter is OFF.

➥ Hold down for 1 second to display the “NOTCH”

screen.

Push to return to the previous screen.

• Rotate the Dial to adjust the notch frequency to reject

an interfering signal while the manual function is ON.

• Notch ﬁ lter center frequency:

SSB/RTTY: –1040 Hz to +4040 Hz

CW: CW pitch frequency –2540 Hz to

CW pitch frequency +2540 Hz

AM: –5060 Hz to +5100 Hz

✔ What is the notch ﬁ lter?

The notch ﬁ lter is a narrow ﬁ lter that eliminates un-

wanted CW or AM carrier tones, while preserving

the desired voice signal. The DSP circuit automati-

cally adjusts the notch frequency to effectively elimi-

nate unwanted tones.

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

PBT RIT

TX / RX

PWR

AF RF/SQL

CLR

M-CH BANK

RIT

TUNER/CALL

MIC/RF PWR

SPEED/PITCH

SET

QUICK

NOTCH

AUTO

TUNE

➔

XFC

SPEECH

MPAD

P.AMP

ATT

i7100

!6!5

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-6

Previous view

!7 DR MODE KEY

(p. 85)

➥ Push to select the DR mode.

• When DR mode is selected, the transceiver automati-

cally selects the DV mode.

➥ In the DR mode, push to cancel it.

• The transceiver returns to the previous screen before

entering the DR mode.

!8 SET MODE KEY

SET

(p. 85)

➥ Push to enter or exit the SET mode.

• “Voice Memo,” “Call Sign,” “RX History,” “DV Memory,”

“My Station,” “DV Set,” “GPS,” “SPEECH,” “QSO/RX

Log,” “Function,” “Tone Control,” “Connector,” “Dis-

play,” “Time Set,” “SD Card” and “Others” set group

are available.

!9 QUICK MENU KEY

QUICK

(p. 85)

➥ Push to open to close the Quick Menu window.

• The Quick Menu is used to quickly select various

functions.

➥ In the setting screen, hold down for 1 second to

open the Default set window.

• Touch “Default” to reset to the default setting.

@0 AUTOTUNE/RXCS KEY

AUTO TUNE

RXCS

(p. 85)

❍ AUTOTUNE KEY Operation (p. 71)

(Mode: CW)

➥ Push to automatically adjust for a zero beat

with the received signal.

Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the

same frequency.

• “AUTO TUNE” blinks when auto tune function is

activated.

• When the RIT function is ON, the auto tune func-

tion changes the RIT frequency, not the displayed

frequency.

❍ RX CALL SIGN CAPTURE KEY Operation

(p. 71)

(Mode: DV, when the DR mode is selected)

➥ Push to open the “RX>CS” screen.

Push again to retune to the previous screen.

➥ Hold down for 1 second to set the received call

signs (station and repeaters) as the operating

call sign.

TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK KEY

XFC

➥ During split frequency or repeater operation, hold

down to listen to the transmit frequency. (p. 82)

• While holding down this switch, the transmit frequen-

cy can be changed with the Dial or

MPAD

• When the Split Lock function is turned ON, hold down

XFC

to cancel the Dial lock function. (pp. 82, 162)

➥ When the RIT function is turned ON, hold down to

listen to the receive frequency. (RIT is temporarily

cancelled.) (p. 69)

➥ In the simplex operation, hold down to monitor the

receive frequency.

• While holding down this key, the squelch is opened

and the interference reject function is temporary OFF.

➥ In the DV mode, the RX monitoring mode is se-

lected by holding down this key. (p. 118)

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

PBT RIT

TX / RX

PWR

AF RF/SQL

CLR

M-CH BANK

RIT

TUNER/CALL

MIC/RF PWR

SPEED/PITCH

SET

QUICK

NOTCH

AUTO

TUNE

➔

XFC

SPEECH

MPAD

P.AMP

ATT

i7100

!8 @0!7 @1!9

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-7

Previous view

@2 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH

SPEECH

❍ SPEECH KEY Operation (p. 45)

Push to audibly announce the S-meter level, the

displayed frequency and the operating mode.

• The S-Level announcement can be turned OFF in the

“S-Level SPEECH” item of the “SPEECH” Set mode.

(p. 164)

SET

> SPEECH > S-Level SPEECH

• When RIT is ON, the RIT offset is not included in the

frequency announcement.

❍ LOCK KEY Operation (p. 77)

Hold down for 1 second to turn the Lock function

ON or OFF.

• The function electronically locks the Dial.

• “ ” appears when the function is ON.

• The function can be select the Dial lock and Panel

lock in the “Lock Function” item of the “Function” Set

mode. (p. 164)

SET

> Function > Lock Function

NOTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] switch operation to

activate the voice synthesizer or the Lock func-

tions can be replaced in the “[SPEECH/LOCK]

Switch” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 164)

SET

> Function > Lock Function

@3 MEMO PAD KEY

MPAD

(p. 144)

Push to sequentially call up the contents from the ➥

memo pads.

The 5 (or 10) most recently programmed frequen-

cies and operating modes can be recalled, start-

ing from the most recent.

• The memo pad capacity can be increased from 5 to

10 in

the “Memopad Numbers” item

of the “Function”

Set mode (p. 164)

SET

> Function > Memopad Numbers

Hold down for 1 second to write the displayed ➥

data into a memo pad.

• The 5 most recent entries remain in the memo pads.

@4 MAIN DIAL

Rotate to change the displayed frequency, select the

Set mode settings, and so on.

@5 MAIN DIAL TENSION LATCH

Select the Dial drag.

• Three positions are selectable. The upper side setting

turns on clicks as the dial is turned.

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

PBT RIT

TX / RX

PWR

AF RF/SQL

CLR

M-CH BANK

RIT

TUNER/CALL

MIC/RF PWR

SPEED/PITCH

SET

QUICK

NOTCH

AUTO

TUNE

➔

XFC

SPEECH

MPAD

P.AMP

ATT

i7100

@2 @3

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-8

Previous view

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

q TX ICON

Indicates either the displayed frequency can be

transmitted, or not.

➥ “” appears while the operating frequency is in

an amateur band.

➥ “” appears while the operating frequency is

not in an amateur band. However, when the “Band

Edge Beep” item is set to “OFF” in the “Function”

Set mode (p. 85), “ ” does not appear.

SET

> Function > Band Edge Beep

“LMT” appears while the output power is de- ➥

creased due to the Power FET’s temperature is

high.

“HOT” appears while the transmission is inhibited ➥

due to the Power FET’s temperature is too high.

w MODE ICONS (p. 43)

Displays the selected operating mode. ➥

• “-D” appears when SSB data, AM data or FM data

mode is selected.

Touch to enter the Mode selection screen. ➥

• On the Mode selection screen, touch the block to se-

lect the operating mode.

e PASSBAND WIDTH ICON (p. 75, 77)

Graphically displays the passband width for twin

PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-

eration.

r IF FILTER ICON (p. 75, 77)

Shows the selected IF ﬁ lter. ➥

Touch to select one of three IF ﬁ lter settings. ➥

• The selected ﬁ lter passband width and shifting value

are displayed for 2 seconds on the window.

➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “FILTER” screen

(Filter) to adjust the ﬁ lter passband width.

➥

When the “FILTER” screen is displayed, touch for

1 second to return to the previous screen.

t QUICK TUNING ICON

Appears when the Quick tuning mode is selected.

• When “Z” is displayed, the frequency changes in pre-set

kHz or 1 MHz quick tuning steps. (p. 38)

• When “Z” is not displayed, the frequency changes in 10

Hz or 1 Hz steps. (pp. 37, 39)

y FREQUENCY READOUTS

Displays the operating frequency. ➥

Touch the MHz digits to enter the Band selection ➥

screen.

Touch the MHz digits for 1 second to turn the 1 ➥

MHz quick tuning mode ON or OFF.

Touch the kHz digits to turn the pre-set kHz quick ➥

tuning mode ON or OFF.

Touch the kHz digits for 1 second to enter the Tun- ➥

ing step selection screen.

Touch the Hz digits to for 1 second to toggle be- ➥

tween 10 Hz and 1 Hz steps.

u SD CARD ICON

➥ “” appears when an SD card is inserted.

➥ “” and “ ” alternately blinks while accessing the

SD card.

i CLOCK READOUT

Shows the current time.

• UTC time or local time can be selected.

o SPLIT ICON (p. 82)

Appears when the Split function is turned ON.

o LOCK INDICATOR (p. 37)

Appears when the Lock function is activated.

!0 LOCK ICON (p. 77)

Appears when the Lock function is turned ON.

qywertui

!1 !2 !3 !5!4

!6!7!8!9@0

Display D

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-9

Previous view

!0 1⁄4 TUNING DIAL SPEED ICON (p. 39)

(Mode: SSB-D/CW/RTTY)

“1/4” appears when the tuning dial speed is set so

that one rotation is equal to 1⁄4 of the normal rota-

tion.

• This function is available only when the quick tuning

function is turned OFF.

!1 VOX ICON (p. 78)

Appears when the VOX function is activated.

!2 PREAMP ICON (p. 71)

Appears when a preampliﬁ er is turned ON.

• In HF/50 MHz frequency band, either “P.AMP1” or

“P.AMP2” is displayed when the preamp 1 or preamp 2

is ON.

• In 144/430 MHz frequency band, “P.AMP” is displayed

when the preamp is ON.

!2 ATTENUATOR ICON (p. 71)

Appears when the Attenuator function is turned

ON.

!3 AGC ICONS (p. 72)

Displays the selected AGC time constant.

• “AGC-F” for AGC fast; “AGC-M” for AGC middle; “AGC-S”

for AGC slow; “AGC-OFF” for AGC OFF.

• In the FM, WFM and DV mode, “AGC-F” for AGC fast is

ﬁ xed.

!4 DUPLEX ICON (p. 65)

“DUP+” appears when plus duplex, “DUP –” appears

when minus duplex (repeater) operation is selected.

!5 RIT ICON (pp. 69, 81)

➥ “RIT” appears when the RIT function is turned

ON.

➥ Shows the shift frequency of the RIT function.

!6 VOICE SQUELCH CONTROL ICON (p. 146)

Appears when the VSC (Voice Squelch Control)

function is turned ON.

!7 PRIORITY WATCH INDICATOR (p. 113)

Appears while priority scan is activated.

!8 NOTCH ICONS (p. 77)

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

➥ “MN” appears when the Manual Notch function is

turned ON.

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM)

➥ “AN” appears when the Automatic Notch function

is turned ON.

!9 NOISE REDUCTION ICON (p. 77)

Appears when the Noise Reduction function is

turned ON.

@0 NOISE BLANKER ICON (p. 76)

Appears when the Noise Blanker function is turned

ON.

@1 VFO/MEMORY ICONS (p. 34)

“VFOA” or “VFOB” appears whether VFO A or ➥

VFO B is selected.

“MEMO” appears when the memory mode is se- ➥

lected.

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

qywertui

!1 !2 !3 !5!4

!6!7!8!9@0

Display D

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-10

Previous view

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

qywertui

!1 !2 !3 !5!4

!6!7!8!9@0

Display D

@2 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUT (p. 100)

Shows the selected memory channel, scan edge ➥

channel or Call channel.

• Memory bank indicator (A to E) appears to the left of

memory channel.

Touch to toggle between the VFO and Memory ➥

modes.

@2 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL ICON

“” appears when the selected memory channel is

set as a select memory channel.

(p. 151)

@3 MULTI-FUNCTION METER INDICATION

➥ Displays the signal strength while receiving.

➥ Displays the relative output power, SWR, ALC or

compression levels while transmitting.

➥ When the Meter Peak Hold function is ON, the

peak level of a received signal strength or the

output power is displayed for approximately 0.5

seconds.

➥ Touch to select the RF power, SWR, ALC or Com-

pression meter.

➥ Touch for 1 second to display the Multi-function

meter.

@4 INFORMATION READOUT (p. 80)

Displays the transmit frequency of the Split opera-

tion, descriptions of the memory channel or Re-

ceived Call sign on the DV mode, and so on.

@5 FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 19)

Shows the function of the Touch keys.

• Push

to change the set of functions assigned to

touch keys.

• Toggles the function display menu between M-1 (M-1

menu), M-2 (M-2 menu), M-3 (M-3 menu), D-1 (D-1

menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu).

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-11

Previous view

Front panel (Controller) (Continued)

Display D

Push ➥

to change the set of functions assigned

to touch keys.

• Toggles the function display menu between M-1 (M-1

menu), M-2 (M-2 menu), M-3 (M-3 menu), D-1 (D-1

menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu).

• Functions vary, depending on the operating mode.

• In the DR mode, the D-1 (D-1 menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu)

can be selected.

Touch or touch for 1 second to select the displayed ➥

functions.

M-1 (M-1 menu) Display D

M-2 (M-2 menu) Display D

(Mode: SSB)

(Mode: SSB-D)

(Mode: CW)

(Mode: RTTY)

(Mode: AM/AM-D)

(Mode: FM/FM-D/WFM)

(Mode: DV)

M-3 (M-3 menu) Display D

(Mode: SSB/AM/AM-D)

(Mode: SSB-D/RTTY)

(Mode: CW)

(Mode: FM/FM-D/WFM/DV)

D-1 (D-1 menu) Display D

(Mode: DV, when the DR mode is selected)

D-2 (D-2 menu) Display D

(Mode: DV, when the DR mode is selected)

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1-12

Previous view

D Function keys on M-1 display

SCAN KEY [SCAN] (p. 147)

Touch to display the “SCAN” screen.

SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 82)

➥ Touch to turn the split function ON or OFF.

• “SPLIT” appears when the split function is ON.

➥ Touch for 1 second to activate the quick split func-

tion.

• The transmit frequency shifts from the receive frequency

according to the “SPLIT Offset” option in the Set mode.

(p. 162)

• The quick split function can be turned OFF in

the “Quick

SPLIT” item

of the Set mode. (p. 162)

VFO SELECT SWITCH [A/B] (pp. 32, 34)

➥ Touch to select either VFO A or VFO B.

➥ Touch

for 1 second to equalize the undisplayed VFO

settings to that of the displayed VFO.

VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [V/M]

➥ Touch to switch between the VFO and memory

modes. (pp. 34, 139)

• Touching Memory channel also selects the VFO or mem-

ory modes. (p. 162)

➥ Touch for 1 second to copy the memory contents to

the displayed VFO on the MAIN Band. (p. 142)

MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 140)

Touch for 1 second to store VFO data into the selected

memory channel.

• This can be done in both the VFO and memory modes.

D Function keys on M-2 display

DUPLEX KEY [DUP] (p. 65)

➥ Touch to select the duplex direction, or to turn OFF

the function.

• “DUP–” or “DUP+” is displayed during duplex operation.

➥ In the FM mode, touch for 1 second to turn the one-

touch repeater function ON or OFF.

AGC KEY [AGC] (p. 72)

(Mode: SSB/SSB-D/CW/RTTY/AM/AM-D)

➥ Touch to select the time constant of the AGC circuit.

➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “AGC” screen.

TONE SQUELCH KEY [TONE] (pp. 62–64)

(Mode: FM)

➥ Touch to select a tone function between subaudible

(repeater) tone, tone squelch and DTCS code.

➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “TONE” screen of

the selected tone function.

DIGITAL SQUELCH KEY [DSQL] (p. 114)

(Mode: DV)

➥ Push to select a digital squelch function between

digital call sign squelch and digital code squelch.

➥ Hold down for 1 second to display the “DSQ” screen

(digital squelch).

MEMORY KEYER MENU KEY [KEYER] (p. 50)

(Mode: CW)

Push to display the

“

KEY

”

screen (memory keyer) or the

“

SEND

”

screen (keyer send), depending on the “KEYER

1st Menu” option in the Set mode

(p. 165)

SPEECH COMPRESSOR KEY [COMP] (p. 80)

(Mode: SSB)

➥ Touch to turn the speech compressor function ON

or OFF.

• “COMP” is displayed when the speech compressor is

ON.

➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “COMP” screen.

RTTY MENU KEY [RTTY] (p. 57)

Touch to display the “RTTY” screen.

CALL SIGN KEY [CS](F-1) (p. 85)

(Mode: DV)

Touch to display the “CS” screen.

• The current call sign for DV operation appears.

TRANSMISSION BANDWIDTH KEY [TBW] (p. 80)

(Mode: SSB)

➥ Touch to display the selected

transmission band-

width.

➥ Touch for 1 second

to select the transmission band-

width.

• Bandwidth is selectable from wide (WIDE), middle (MID)

and narrow (NAR).

1⁄4 TUNING FUNCTION KEY [1⁄4] (p. 39)

(Mode: SSB-D/CW/RTTY)

Touch to turn the 1⁄4 Tuning function ON or OFF.

• “ ” is displayed when the 1⁄4 Tuning function is ON.

CALL RECORD KEY [CD] (p. 95)

(Mode: DV)

Touch to display the “CD” screen.

• The call record channel appears. (RX01 to RX20)

Operating SSB .........................................................................4-2

Operating CW ...........................................................................4-3

About the CW reverse mode D ...................................................4-4

About keying speed D .................................................................4-4

About CW pitch control D............................................................4-4

CW sidetone function D ..............................................................4-5

CW Auto tune function D ............................................................4-5

Electronic keyer functions ......................................................4-6

Memory keyer menu construction D ...........................................4-6

Memory keyer send menu D .......................................................4-7

Editing a memory keyer D ...........................................................4-8

Contest number Set mode D ......................................................4-9

Keyer Set mode D .......................................................................4-10

Operating RTTY (FSK) .............................................................4-12

The functions for RTTY operation..........................................4-13

About RTTY reverse mode D ......................................................4-13

Twin Peak Filter D .......................................................................4-13

RTTY Set mode D .......................................................................4-14

RTTY decoder D .........................................................................4-15

RTTY decode Set mode D ..........................................................4-16

Transmitting an RTTY memory D ................................................4-17

Editing an RTTY memory D ........................................................4-18

Turning ON the RTTY decode log D ...........................................4-19

RTTY decode log Set mode D ....................................................4-20

Operating AM/FM .....................................................................4-21

Tone squelch operation ..........................................................4-22

DTCS operation .......................................................................4-23

Tone scan/DTCS code scan operation ..................................4-24

Repeater operation ..................................................................4-25

Repeater access tone frequency setting D .................................4-26

One-touch repeater function D....................................................4-27

Transmit frequency monitor check D ........................................... 4-28

1750 Hz tone burst D ..................................................................4-28

Turning ON the Auto Repeater function D

(U.S.A. and Korea versions only) .............................................4-29

Storing a non standard repeater D ............................................4-30

4-1

Section 4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Previous view

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-2

Previous view

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “SSB” to select w

the LSB or USB mode.

• When operating above 10 MHz, USB is selected ﬁ rst;

when operating below 10 MHz, LSB is selected ﬁ rst.

• After selecting LSB or USB, touch “SSB” again to toggle

between USB and LSB modes, if necessary.

• To select the data mode, after selecting LSB or USB,

touch “DATA” to select the data mode, if needed.

Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal. e

• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.

•

The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step selec-

tion screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)

Rotate [AF] r(L)to adjust the audio to a comfort-

able listening level.

Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. t

• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

Speak into the microphone at your normal voice y

level.

If necessary, adjust the microphone gain or RF pow- u

er on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.

q Push

MIC/RF PWR

power adjustment display.

w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the MIC gain, or

[BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.

• To adjust the MIC gain, touch the TX meter to select

the ALC meter. And then, adjust it so that the ALC

meter reading stays within the ALC zone.

When the MIC gain is adjusted too high, your

transmitted voice may be distorted.

e Push

Release [PTT] to receive. i

Operating SSB

Convenient Receive functions

• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)

• Noise blanker (p. 76)

• Noise reduction (p. 77)

• Notch ﬁ lter (p. 77)

• Receive ﬁ lter width (HPF/LPF) (p. 169)

• Tone control (p. 169)

Convenient Transmit functions

• Speech compressor (p. 78)

• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 80)

• Transmit quality monitor (p. 81)

• Transmit ﬁ lter width (p. 80)

• Tone control (p. 169)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

“LSB” or “USB” appears

TX meter

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-3

Previous view

Operating CW

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “CW” to select w

the CW mode.

• After the CW mode is selected, touch “CW” again to tog-

gle between CW and CW-R modes, if necessary.

Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal. e

• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.

• The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step se-

lection screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)

Rotate [AF] r(L) to adjust the audio to a comfort-

able listening level.

Set the Break-in operation to the semi break-in or full t

break-in mode.

• “BKIN,” “F-BKIN” or “OFF (no indication)” appears.

While the “M-3” menu is selected, touch [BK-IN](D)

once or twice to select the Break-in operation.

• BKIN : Semi break-in

• F-BKIN : Full break-in

• OFF : No break-in (ACC socket connection for TX

is necessary, as shown on page 22.)

If a microphone is connected, its PTT can be

used instead of the external TX switch.

If the Semi break-in operation is selected at step yt,

set the Break-in delay.

q While the “M-3” menu is selected, touch

[BK-IN](D) for 1 second to open the Break-in

delay adjustment window.

w Rotate the Dial to adjust the delay time.

• The adjustable delay time is between 2.0 and 13.0

dots.

Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW sig- u

nals.

• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

•

The Po meter indicates transmitted CW output power.

If desired, adjust the Key speed or CW pitch. i

q Push

SPEED/PITCH

pitch adjustment window.

w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the Key speed, or

[BANK] (L) to the CW pitch.

• The adjustable key speed is between 6 and 48 wpm

(words per minute).

• The adjustable CW pitch is between 300 and 900

Hz.

e Push

Stop keying to return to receive. o

Convenient Receive functions

• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)

• Noise blanker (p. 76)

• Noise reduction (p. 77)

• Manual Notch ﬁ lter (p. 77)

• ¼ function (p. 39)

• CW pitch control (p. 49)

Convenient Transmit functions

• Break-in function (p. 79)

• Keying speed setting (p. 49)

• Memory keyer (p. 50)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

“CW” or “CW-R” appears

Semi break-in operation is selected

Appears

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-4

Previous view

Operating CW (Continued)

About the CW reverse mode D

The CW reverse mode receives signals with a reverse

side CW carrier point similar to voice LSB and USB

modes.

Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal

and you want to reduce the interfering tone.

On the Mode selection screen, touch “CW” to select q

the CW mode.

After the CW mode is selected, touch “CW” again on w

the Mode selection screen to toggle between CW

and CW-R modes.

• Check that the interfering tone can be reduced.

About keying speed D

The transceiver’s internal electronic keyer speed can

be adjusted to between 6 and 48 wpm (words per min-

ute).

Push q

SPEED/PITCH

adjustment display.

Rotate [M-CH] w(L) clockwise to increase keying

speed; counterclockwise to decrease it.

Push e

About CW pitch control D

The received CW audio pitch can be adjusted to suit

your preference without changing the operating fre-

quency.

Push q

SPEED/PITCH

adjustment display.

Rotate [BANK] w(L) to suit your preference.

• Adjustable from 300 to 900 Hz (in 5 Hz steps).

Push e

Key speed adjustment

CW pitch adjustment

Carrier point

The CW carrier point is set to the LSB side by default,

the setting can be changed to USB side in the “CW

Normal Side” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 165)

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

BFO

CW-R mode (USB side)

BFO

Desired signal

CW mode (LSB side)

Interference Desired signalInterference

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-5

Previous view

CW Auto tune function D

The automatic tuning function automatically tunes the

displayed frequency when an off-frequency signal is

received. This function is active while in the CW mode

is selected.

Push ➥

AUTO TUNE

RXCS

(R) to automatically adjust for a

zero beat with the received signal.

Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same

frequency.

• “AUTO TUNE” blinks when auto tune function is activat-

ed.

• If

AUTO TUNE

RXCS

(R) is pushed when the RIT function is ON,

the auto tune function changes the RIT frequency, not

the displayed frequency.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal with

interference, the automatic tuning function may tune the

receiver to an undesired signal.

If the off-frequency signal is too far away, the Auto tune func-

tion may not work. In that case, an error beep sounds.

AUTO TUNE icon

CW sidetone function D

When the transceiver is in the receive mode (and the

Break-in function is OFF— p. 79), you can listen to the

CW sidetone without actually transmitting.

You can also use the CW sidetone to practice CW send-

ing, but be sure to turn OFF the Break-in function.

The CW sidetone level can be adjusted in the “Side

Tone Level” item of the Keyer Set mode (p. 54).

Operating CW (Continued)

AUTO TUNE

RXCS

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-6

Previous view

Electronic keyer functions

You can access a number of convenient built-in elec-

tronic keyer functions in the memory keyer menu.

In the CW mode,

push

to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [KEYER]( wD), and then push

play the “KEYER” screen (Memory Keyer).

Touch [SEND], [EDIT], [001] or [SET]( eD) to select

the desired menu.

See the diagram below.

• Push

• Keyer (Root) screen

• Keyer Send screen (p. 51)

• Keyer Memory (Edit) screen (p. 52)

• Keyer 001 (Contest number Set) screen (p. 53)

• Keyer Set screen (p. 54)

[KEYER]

[SEND]

[EDIT]

: Returns to the previous display.

[001]

[SET]

[SEND]

[EDIT]

[001]

[SET]

Memory keyer menu construction D

The screen you want to appear ﬁ rst can be selected

in the “KEYER 1st Menu” item of the “Function” Set

mode. (p. 165)

SET

Push

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-7

Previous view

Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

Memory keyer send menu D

Preset characters can be sent using the Keyer Send

screen. Contents of the memory keyer are enterd in the

Keyer Memory (Edit) screen.

• Transmitting

In the CW mode,

turn ON the Break-in function. (p.

79)

• When the Break-in function is OFF and you do step r,

you can listen the memory keyer contents without trans-

mitting.

Push w

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [KEYER]( eD) to display the “KEYER SEND”

screen.

• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, touch

[SEND](D) to display the “KEYER SEND” screen.

Touch one of the Memory keys, [M1] to [M4]( rD), to

send the memory keyer contents.

• Touch a Memory key for 1 second to repeatedly send the

contents; touch any Memory key to stop the transmis-

sion.

• Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 60 seconds (1

second steps) in the “Keyer Repeat Time” item of the

“KEYER SET” screen. (p. 54)

• “M1”– “M4” are highlighted while transmitting.

• The contest number counter advances each time the

contents are sent.

• Push [−1](D) to reduce the contest number advances by

one before sending the memory keyer contents to a sta-

tion a second time.

Push t

screen.

For your information

When an external keypad is connected to pin 3 and

pin 7 of the [MIC] connector, the contents of M1 to

M4 can be transmitted without selecting the “KEYER

SEND” screen.

See page 167 for details.

• M1 sending display

• M2 sending display

• M3 sending display

• M4 sending display

• While transmitting repeatedly

Counter

Count up trigger icon

“ [ ” and “ ] ” appear

Touch [KEYER]

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-8

Previous view

Editing a memory keyer D

The contents of the memory keyer memories can be

set on the Keyer Memory (Edit) screen. The memory

keyer can memorize and retransmit 4 CW key codes for

often-used CW sentences, contest numbers or a count

up trigger. The total capacity of the memory keyer is 70

characters per memory channel.

• Programming contents

In the CW mode,

push

to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [KEYER]( wD) to display the “KEYER SEND”

screen.

• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, skip step e.

Push e

Touch [EDIT]( rD) to display the “KEYER MEMORY”

(Edit) screen.

• The memory contents are displayed.

Touch for 1 second on a desired memory channel to t

be edited, and then touch “Edit.”

• The memory programming screen appears.

Touch the desired block one or more times to select y

the desired character, number or symbol.

Selectable characters, numbers and symbols

A to Z, 0 to 9, ⁄ ? ^ . , @ ✱

• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input

and Number input mode.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selec-

tion window.

• Touch “” to input a space.

Touch [ u](D) or [](D) to move the cursor back-

wards or forwards.

i Repeat steps y and u to program up to 70 charac-

ters of memory contents, and then push [ENT](D).

o Touch [](D) or push

“KEYER” (Root) screen.

NOTE:

“^” is used to transmit a string of characters with no

inter-character space. Put a “^” before a text string such

as ^AR, and the string “

” is sent with no space.

“✱” is used to insert the CW contest number. The number

automatically advances by 1. This function is available for

only one memory keyer channel at a time. “✱” is used in

memory keyer channel M2 by default.

• Preprogrammed memory keyer contents

Memory keyer

channel Contents

M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE JA1 JA1 TEST

M2 UR 5NN✱ BK

M3 CFM TU

M4 QRZ?

Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

“KEYER” (Root) screen

• Memory keyer programming mode

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch the desired

channel for 1 sec-

ond

Touch “Edit”

Touch [EDIT]

• M2 default indication

When inputting an asterisk, the

counter is incremented by 1.

Input a space

Select Alphabet or Number input

Move the cursor

Delete a character

Select a Symbol

Enter

Cancel edit

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-9

Previous view

Contest number Set mode D

This mode is used to set the contest number, count up

trigger and Present number.

• Setting contents

In the CW mode, p

ush

to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

w Push [KEYER](D) to display the “KEYER SEND”

screen.

• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, skip step e.

Push e

Push [001]( rD) to enter the “KEYER 001” (Contest

Number Set) screen.

Touch the desired item to select. t

Touch the ydesired option or rotate the Dial to change

the setting.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default

set window, then select “Default” to reset to the default

setting.

Push u

screen.

Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

“KEYER” (Root) screen

• Contest number Set mode

Number Style (Default: Normal)

This item sets the numbering system used for contest

numbers— normal or short morse numbers.

Short morse numbers are also referred to as “cut”

numbers.

• Normal: Does not use short morse numbers

• 190➔ANO: Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.

• 190➔ANT: Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.

• 90➔NO: Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.

• 90➔NT: Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.

Count Up Trigger (Default: M2)

Set the count-up trigger to one of four memory slots for

the contest number exchange. The count-up trigger al-

lows the contest number to automatically advance after

each complete number exchange is sent.

• M1, M2, M3 or M4 can be set.

Present Number (Default: 001)

This item shows the current number for the count-up

trigger channel set above.

• Touch [+] or [–](D) or rotate the Dial to change the

number.

• Hold down the item for 1 second to display the default

set window, then touch “Default” to set the counter to

“001.”

• To the default setting

• Default set window

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Touch [001]

Touch the item

for 1 second.

Touch “Default.”

Touch the item

( Example: Num-

ber Style)

Touch the option

( Example:

190➔ANO)

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-10

Previous view

Keyer Set mode D

This Set mode is used to set the CW sidetone, memory

keyer repeat time, dash weight, paddle speciﬁ cations,

keyer type, and so on.

• Setting contents

In the CW mode, p

ush

to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

w Push [KEYER](D) to display the “KEYER SEND”

screen.

• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, skip step e.

Push e

Touch [SET]( rD) to enter the “KEYER SET” screen.

Touch the desired item to select. t

• See the next page for details of the set items and op-

tions.

Touch the ydesired option or rotate the Dial to change

the value.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the De-

fault set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the

default setting.

Touch [ u](D) or push

“KEYER” (Root) screen.

Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

“KEYER” screen (Memory Keyer)

• Keyer Set mode

Touch [SET]

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Returns to the

Moves to the

(Example: Touch the “Side Tone Level.”)

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-11

Previous view

Side Tone Level (Default: 50%)

Select the CW sidetone output level.

• 0 to 100% can be selected.

Side Tone Level Limit (Default: ON)

Set the CW sidetone level limit. When the [AF] (L)

control is rotated above a speciﬁ ed level, the CW

sidetone does not increase.

• OFF: CW sidetone level is not limited.

• ON: CW sidetone level is limited.

Keyer Repeat Time (Default: 2sec)

When sending CW using the repeat timer, set the time

between transmissions.

• 1 to 60 seconds in 1 second steps can be selected.

Dot/Dash Ratio (Default: 1:1:3.0)

Set the dot/dash ratio.

• 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.

Keying weight example: Morse code “K”

DASH

Weight setting:

1:1:3 (default)

Weight setting:

Adjusted

DASH

DOT (fixed*)

Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)

Rise Time (Default: 4ms)

Set the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope.

• 2, 4, 6 or 8 milliseconds can be selected.

About rise time

Key action

Tx output power

Rise time

Set Tx power level

Time

Key clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated if

the rise time of a CW waveform is too short.

Paddle Polarity (Default: NORMAL)

Set the paddle polarity.

• Normal or reverse polarity can be selected.

Keyer Type (Default: ELEC-KEY)

Select the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY] connector on the

controller.

• Straight key, BUG-KEY or ELEC-KEY can be select-

ed.

Regardless of this setting, the [KEY] connector of

the Main unit is for only a straight key.

MIC Up/Down Keyer (Default: OFF)

Set the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches to be used as

a key. (The microphone [UP]/[DN] switches do not work

as a “squeeze key.”)

• ON: The [UP]/[DN] switches can be used as a key

for CW.

• OFF: The [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used as a

key for CW.

• When “ON” is selected, the frequency and memory

channels cannot be changed using the [UP]/[DN]

switches.

• The optional HM-151 microphone cannot be used

as a MIC Up/Down Keyer.

Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

Keyer set mode (Continued) D

* SPACE and DOT length can be adjusted on the

Key Speed/CW pitch adjustment display.

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-12

Previous view

When using your RTTY terminal or TNC, consult the

manual that comes with the equipment.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “RTTY” to se- w

lect the RTTY mode.

• After the RTTY mode is selected, touch “RTTY” again to

toggle between the normal and reverse modes, if need-

ed.

Enter the RTTY decoder screen. e

q Push

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size

between normal and wide.

Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal. r

• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.

• If the received signal cannot be demodulated, try to se-

lect the RTTY reverse mode in step w.

• The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step se-

lection screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)

Switch ON the external TX switch to set the trans- t

ceiver to the transmit mode, or transmit a SEND sig-

nal from your TNC.

• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

•

The Po meter displays the transmitted

RTTY signal

strength.

Use your connected PC or TNC (TU) to transmit y

RTTY (FSK) signals.

Switch OFF the external TX switch to receive. u

Convenient Receive functions

• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)

• Noise blanker (p. 76)

• Noise reduction (p. 77)

• Notch ﬁ lter (p. 77)

• ¼ function (p. 39)

• Twin Peak Filter (p. 58)

Operating RTTY (FSK)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

“RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears

Touch [DEC]

Rotate the Dial to the point where both

sides of the dots equally appear.

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-13

Previous view

The functions for RTTY operation

About RTTY reverse mode D

Received characters are occasionally garbled when

the Mark and Space signals are reversed. This reversal

can be caused by incorrect TNC connections, setting

or commands.

To correctly receive reversed RTTY signals, select the

RTTY reverse mode.

On the Mode selection screen, touch “RTTY” to se- q

lect the RTTY mode.

After the RTTY mode is selected, touch “RTTY” again w

on the Mode selection screen, toggles between the

normal and reverse modes.

• “RTTY-R” appears when the RTTY reverse mode is se-

lected.

Twin Peak Filter D

The Twin Peak Filter changes the receive frequency re-

sponse by boosting 2125 and 2295 Hz for better copy-

ing of RTTY signals.

In the RTTY mode, push q

times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Touch [RTTY]( wD) to display the “RTTY SET”

screen.

Touch the “Twin Peak Filter” item to select. e

Touch “ON” to turn ON the Twin Peak Filter. r

Touch [ t](D) or push

“M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

NOTE: When the Twin Peak Filter is in use, the re-

ceived audio output may increase. This is normal;

not a malfunction.

Normal Reverse

170 Hz170 Hz 2125 Hz2125 Hz

BFOBFO Space

Space Mark

Mark

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [RTTY]

Touch “Twin

Peak Filter”

Touch “ON”

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-14

Previous view

RTTY Set mode D

The RTTY Set mode is used to set the Twin peak ﬁ lter

function, mark and shift frequencies and the keying po-

larity.

• Setting contents

In the RTTY mode, push q

times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Touch [RTTY]( wD) to display the “RTTY SET”

screen.

Touch the desired item to select. e

• See below for details of the set items and options.

Touch the rdesired option or rotate the Dial to change

the setting.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the De-

fault set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the

default setting.

Touch [ t](D) or push

“M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Twin Peak Filter (Default: OFF)

Turn the Twin Peak Filter ON or OFF.

Mark Frequency (Default: 2125)

Select the RTTY mark frequency.

• 1275, 1615 and 2125 Hz are selectable.

Shift Width (Default: 170)

Select the RTTY frequency shift.

• 170, 200 and 425 Hz are selectable.

Keying Polarity (Default: NORMAL)

Select normal or reverse keying polarity.

• NORMAL: Key open/close = Mark/Space

• REVERSE: Key open/close = Space/Mark

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch the option

(Example: 1275)

Touch the item

(Example: Mark

Frequency)

Touch [RTTY]

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-15

Previous view

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

RTTY decoder D

The transceiver has an RTTY decoder for Baudot (mark

frequency: 2125 Hz, shift frequency: 170 Hz, 45 bps).

An external terminal unit (TU) or terminal node con-

nector (TNC) is not necessary for receiving a Baudot

signal.

In the RTTY mode, push q

times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [HOLD]( eD) to turn ON the Hold function to

hold the current screen.

• “H” appears when this function is turned ON.

• Touch [HOLD](D) again to turn OFF the Hold function.

Touch [CLR]( rD) for 1 second to clear the displayed

characters.

• “H” disappears at the same time as the displayed char-

acters are cleared. (The hold function is cancelled.)

Push t

M-2).

• Setting the decoder threshold level

If some characters are displayed when no signal is re-

ceived, adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level.

In the RTTY mode, push q

times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [<1>]( eD) to display the RTTY decoder (2)

screen.

• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY de-

coder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.

Touch [ADJ]( rD) to select the threshold level adjust-

ment mode.

Rotate the Dial to adjust the RTTY decoder thresh- t

old level.

• Touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the default set-

ting, if desired.

Push y

The number of the decoder display lines, the UnShift

On Space (USOS) function and new line code can

be set in the RTTY Set mode. (p. 60)

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Hold function

ON/OFF

Clear the character

Appears when the Hold function

is turned ON.

Touch [DEC]

Touch [ADJ]

Touch for 1 second to reset

the threshold level to default.

Threshold level display

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-16

Previous view

Decode USOS (Default: ON)

Turn the USOS (UnShift On Space) function ON or

OFF. This function decodes a letter code after receiving

a “space.”

• OFF: Decodes as a character code

• ON: Decodes as a letter code

Decode New Line (Default: CR,LF,CR+LF)

Select the internal RTTY decoder new line code.

CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed

• CR,LF,CR+LF: Makes a new line with any code.

• CR+LF: Makes a new line with only the CR+LF

code.

TX USOS (Default: ON)

Explicitly inserts the FIGS character, even though it is

not required by the receiving station.

• OFF: Inserts FIGS

• ON: Does not insert FIGS

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

RTTY decode Set mode D

The RTTY decode Set mode is used to set the decode

USOS function, RTTY decoder new line code and the

TX USOS function.

• Setting contents

In the RTTY mode, push q

times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [<1>]( eD) to display the RTTY decoder (2)

screen.

• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY de-

coder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.

Touch [SET]( rD) to enter the “RTTY DECODE SET”

screen.

Touch the desired item to select. t

• See below for details of the set items and options.

Touch the ydesired option or rotate the Dial to change

the setting.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the De-

fault set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the

default setting.

Touch [ u](D) or push

“KEYER” (Root) screen.

Push i

(C)

to return to the “M-2” screen (Menu

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Touch [SET]

Touch the item

( Example: TX

USOS)

Touch the option

(Example: OFF)

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-17

Previous view

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

RTTY memory screen (RT1–RT4)

RTTY memory screen (RT5–RT8)

Transmitting an RTTY memory D

Previously entered characters can be sent using the

RTTY memory. Contents of the memory are enter in

the RTTY Memory (Edit) screen.

In the RTTY mode, push q

times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [RTM]( eD) to display the RTTY memory

screen.

Touch [ r](D) to select the memory group to trans-

mit.

• Touch [](D) to toggle the memory group between RT1–

RT4 and RT5–RT8.

Touch one of the memory keys, [RT1] to [RT4], or t

[RT5] to [RT8](D).

• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

• The TX contents are displayed beside the “ ” icon.

Push y

M-2).

For your information

When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] con-

nector on the Controller, one of RT1 to RT4 RTTY

memory contents can be transmitted while the RTTY

decode screen is selected in the RTTY mode. (pgs.

18, 133)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

• Transmits RT6

Touch [DEC]

Touch [RTM]

Touch [RT6]

The TX contents are displayed “ ” blinks

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-18

Previous view

• Preprogrammed contents

CH Contents

RT1 DE ICOM ICOM K

RT2 DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K

RT3 QSL UR 599–599 BK

RT4 QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599 BK

RT5 73 GL SK

RT6 CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K

RT7 MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7100 & ANTENNA IS A

3–ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI.

RT8 MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK UNIT &

DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7100.

Touch “Edit”

• RTTY memory programming mode

• RT1 default indication

Input a space

Select Alphabet or Number input

Move the cursor

Delete a character

Select a Symbol

Enter

Cancel edit

Touch [EDIT]

Touch the desired

channel for 1 sec-

ond

Editing an RTTY memory D

The contents of the RTTY memories can be set on the

RTTY Memory (Edit) screen. The RTTY memory can

memorize and retransmit 8 RTTY message for often-

used RTTY information. The total capacity of the RTTY

memory is 70 characters per memory channel.

• Programming contents

In the RTTY mode,

push

times to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [<1>]( eD) to display the RTTY decoder (2)

screen.

• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY de-

coder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.

Touch [EDIT]( rD) to display the “RTTY MEMORY”

(Edit) screen.

• The memory contents are displayed.

Touch for 1 second on a desired memory channel to t

be edited, and then touch “Edit.”

• Touch [] or [](D) to select the displayed page.

• The memory programming screen appears.

Touch the desired block one or more times to select y

the desired character or symbol.

Selectable characters and symbols

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

1234567890

! $ & ? " ' – / . , : ; ( ) 

• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input

and Number input mode.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selec-

tion window.

• Touch “” to input a space.

Touch [ u](D) or [](D) to move the cursor back-

wards or forwards.

Repeat steps iy and u to program up to 70 charac-

ters of memory contents, and then push [ENT](D).

Touch [ o](D) or push

RTTY Decode (2) screen.

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-19

Previous view

• RTTY decode log

SD card icon

Turning ON the RTTY decode log D

Turn ON the RTTY decode log to store your RTTY op-

erating record, both TX and RX, into an SD card.

Be sure to insert the SD card, otherwise this function

does not work properly. The SD card is not supplied

byu Icom.

In the RTTY mode,

push

times to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [<1>]( eD) to display the RTTY decoder (2)

screen.

• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY de-

coder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.

Touch [LOG]( rD) to display the “RTTY DECODE

LOG” screen.

Touch “Decode Log,” and then select the RTTY de- t

code log function ON or OFF.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default

set window, then select “Default” to reset to the default

setting.

• When “ON” is selected, the RTTY decode log starts.

Touch [ y](D) or push

RTTY Decoder screen.

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [LOG]

Touch “Decode

Log”

Touch “ON”

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-20

Previous view

RTTY decode log Set mode

RTTY decode log Set mode D

The RTTY decode log Set mode is used to set the File

Type and the Time stamps.

In the RTTY mode,

push

times to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [DEC]( wD) to display the RTTY decoder

screen.

• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size be-

tween normal and wide.

Touch [<1>]( eD) to display the RTTY decoder (2)

screen.

• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY de-

coder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.

Touch [LOG]( rD) to display the “RTTY DECODE

LOG” screen.

Touch “Log Set” to enter the “RTTY DECODE LOG t

SET” screen.

Touch the desired item to select. y

• See below for details of the set items and options.

Touch the udesired option to change the setting.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the De-

fault set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the

default setting.

Touch [ i](D) or push

“RTTY DECODE LOG” screen.

Touch [ o](D) or push

RTTY Decoder screen.

The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)

File type (Default: Text)

Select ﬁ le type for saving a Log into an SD card, as the

Text or HTML format.

• Text: Save as a Text format

• HTML: Save as an HTML format

Time stamp (Default: ON)

Adds the time stamp (date, transmission or reception

time) to the LOG ﬁ le.

• OFF: Does not save the time stamp.

• ON: Saves the date and time data.

Time stamp (time) (Default: Local)

Select the time of the time stamp whether it is in local

or UTC.

NOTE: The time won’t be saved when “OFF” is selected

in “Time Stamp” to the left.

• Local: The time is used in Local time

• UTC: The time is used in UTC time

Time stamp (frequency) (Default: ON)

Selects the time stamp data whether adding the fre-

quency or not.

NOTE: The frequency won’t be saved when “OFF” is

selected in “Time Stamp” to the left.

• OFF: Does not save the frequency

• ON: Saves the frequency data

Touch [LOG]

Touch “Log Set”

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-21

Previous view

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “AM” or “FM” to w

select the AM or FM mode.

• To select the data mode, after selecting AM or FM, touch

“DATA” to select the data mode, if needed.

Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal. e

• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.

•

The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step selec-

tion screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)

Rotate [AF] r(L)to adjust the audio to a comfort-

able listening level.

Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit. t

• The TX/RX indicator lights red.

Speak into the microphone at your normal voice y

level.

If necessary, adjust the microphone gain or RF pow- u

er on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.

q Push

MIC/RF PWR

power adjustment display.

w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the MIC gain, or

[BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.

• To adjust the MIC gain, adjust it with another station

listening to your voice for clarity.

When the MIC gain is adjusted too high, your

transmitted voice may be distorted.

e Push

Release [PTT] to receive. i

NOTE: On the 144/440 MHz frequency band, you

can transmit in the AM mode.

Operating AM/FM

Convenient Receive functions

• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)

• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)

This function is not usable in the FM mode.

• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)

• Noise blanker (p. 76)

• Noise reduction (p. 77)

• Notch ﬁ lter (p. 77)

Convenient Transmit functions

• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 80)

• Transmit quality monitor (p. 81)

• Tone control (p. 169)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

“AM” or “FM” appears

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-22

Previous view

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal

containing a matching subaudible tone. You can silently

wait for calls from others using the same tone.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select w

the FM mode.

Push e

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [TONE]( rD) one or more times to turn ON the

Tone squelch function.

• “TSQL” appears.

• Touch [TONE](D) to toggle between “TONE,” “TSQL,”

“DTCS” and OFF (icon disappears).

Touch [TONE]( tD) for 1 second to display the “TONE”

screen.

• “TSQL Tone” appears.

Rotate the Dial to select the desired tone squelch y

frequency. See the table shown below.

• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default

setting.

Push u

Communicate in the usual manner. i

• The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal

containing a matching subaudible tone.

• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit sig-

nal.

Tone squelch operation

67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3

69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1

71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7

74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1

77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7

79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1

82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6

85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

• Available tone squelch frequencies (Unit: Hz)

Touch [TONE]

for 1 second

TSQL icon

Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

Tone frequency

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-23

Previous view

The DTCS function is another method of communica-

tions using selective calling. Only received signals hav-

ing a matching 3-digit code will open the squelch.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select w

the FM mode.

Push e

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [TONE]( rD) one or more times to turn ON the

DTCS function.

• “DTCS” appears.

• Touch [TONE](D) to toggle between “TONE,” “TSQL,”

“DTCS” and OFF (icon disappears).

Touch [TONE]( tD) for 1 second to display the “TONE”

screen.

• “DTCS Code” appears.

Rotate the Dial to select the desired DTCS code y

number. And touch [POL](D) to select the desired

code polarity.

NN: Normal polarity is used for both transmit and

receive. (Default)

NR: Normal polarity is used for transmit, reversed

polarity is used for receive.

RN: Reversed polarity is used for transmit, normal

polarity is used for receive.

RR: Reversed polarity is used for both transmit and

receive.

• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default

setting.

Push u

Communicate in the usual manner. i

• The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal

containing a matching subaudible tone.

• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit sig-

nal.

DTCS operation

• Available DTCS codes

023 054 125 165 245 274 356 445 506 627 732

025 065 131 172 246 306 364 446 516 631 734

026 071 132 174 251 311 365 452 523 632 743

031 072 134 205 252 315 371 454 526 654 754

032 073 143 212 255 325 411 455 532 662

036 074 145 223 261 331 412 462 546 664

043 114 152 225 263 332 413 464 565 703

047 115 155 226 265 343 423 465 606 712

051 116 156 243 266 346 431 466 612 723

053 122 162 244 271 351 432 503 624 731

Touch [TONE]

for 1 second

DTCS icon

Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

DTCS code DTCS polarity

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-24

Previous view

To search for a repeater’s sub-audible tone frequency,

a tone scan is available.

By monitoring a repeater signal with a tone squelch or

DTCS, you can determine the tone frequency neces-

sary to open the repeater or the squelch.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select w

the FM mode.

Push e

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [TONE]( rD) for 1 second to display the “TONE”

screen.

Touch [TONE]( tD) one or more times to select the

tone type to be scanned.

• “Repeater Tone” for a repeater tone, “TSQL Tone” for tone

squelch or “DTCS Code” for a DTCS code, appears.

• When selecting a DTCS code to be scanned, the DTCS

code and its polarity is displayed. You can select the de-

sired polarity by pushing [POL](D).

“NN”: Normal polarity for both transmit and receive.

“NR”: Normal polarity for transmit and reverse polarity for

receive.

“RN”: Reverse polarity for transmit and normal polarity for

receive.

“RR”: Reverse polarity for both transmit and receive.

Touch [SCAN]( yD) to start the Tone or DTCS scan.

• “Repeater Tone SCAN,” “TSQL Tone SCAN” or “DTCS

Code SCAN” blinks, depending on the type you select-

ed.

• If the squelch is open while scanning, the scan speed

decreases.

• If

“Up/Down” is selected as

the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” op-

tion

in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the

scanning direction. (p. 147)

When a matched tone or code is found, the scan u

pauses, and the detected subaudible tone frequency

or DTCS code is set.

• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default

setting.

Touch [SCAN]( iD) to cancel the scan.

When the tone scan or DTCS code scan is used in

the Memory or Call channel mode, the detected tone

frequency or code can be temporarily used.

To save the detected tone frequency or code setting,

you must overwrite the Memory or Call channel data.

(pp. 140, 141)

Tone scan/DTCS code scan operation

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

While Tone scanning in the VFO mode

Touch [TONE] to

select the tone

type

Touch [TONE]

for 1 second

Touch [SCAN]

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-25

Previous view

A repeater receives transmitted signals and retransmits

them on a different frequency. When using a repeater,

the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre-

quency by a frequency offset.

A repeater can be accessed using the duplex function-

by setting the frequency shift to the same value as the

repeater’s frequency offset.

See page 94 for details on accessing a D-STAR®

repeater.

Touch the Memory channel indication once or twice q

to select the VFO mode.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w

On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select e

the FM mode.

Rotate the Dial to set the receive frequency (Repeat- r

er output frequency).

When the Auto Repeater function is turned ON

(available in only the U.S.A. and Korea versions),

steps t and y are not necessary. (p. 67)

ush

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu), then touch [DUP](D) one

or more times to set the offset direction.

• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears.

• The transmit frequency (repeater input frequency) ap-

pears above the function menu.

• The frequency offset (amount of shift) can be set in

the

“DUP Offset” item

of the Function Set. (p. 163)

Touch [TONE]( yD) to turn ON the repeater tone.

• “TONE” appears.

• The tone frequency can be set in

the

“TONE” screen.

88.5 Hz is set by default. (p. 4-25)

Communicate in the normal way. u

• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit sig-

nal.

Repeater operation

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Frequency Offset setting

The frequency offset (amount of shift) can be set in

the

“DUP Offset” item

of the Function Set. (p. 163)

SET

Frequency offset

5.0000 MHz

If the Repeater tone frequency or the frequency off-

set is changed, the tone frequency or frequency off-

set for auto repeater function is also changed.

Repeater tone icon

Transmit frequency

(Repeater input frequency)

Duplex icon

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-26

Previous view

Repeater operation (Continued)

Repeater access tone frequency setting D

Some repeaters require a subaudible tone to be ac-

cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your

normal signal and must be set ﬁ rst. You can select 50

tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.

In the FM mode, push q

to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [TONE]( wD) one or more times to turn ON the

Tone encoder function.

• “TONE” appears.

• Touch [TONE](D) to toggle between “TONE,” “TSQL,”

“DTCS” and OFF (icon disappears).

Touch [TONE]( eD) for 1 second to display the “TONE”

screen.

• “Repeater Tone” appears.

Rotate the Dial to select the desired tone squelch r

frequency. See the table below.

• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default

setting.

Push t

Communicate in the normal way. y

• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit sig-

nal.

67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3

69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1

71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7

74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1

77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7

79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1

82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6

85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8

• Selectable tone frequencies (Unit: Hz)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [TONE]

for 1 second

Repeater tone icon

Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

Tone frequency

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-27

Previous view

Repeater operation (Continued)

One-touch repeater function D

This function allows you to set the repeater operation

by holding down one switch.

First, set the frequency offset as well as the repeater

access tone frequency (p. 163).

Touch the Memory channel indication once or twice q

to select the VFO mode.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) w

On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select e

the FM mode.

Rotate the Dial to set the receive frequency (Repeat- r

er output frequency).

ush

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu), then touch [DUP](D) for 1

second to turn ON the one touch repeater function.

• “TONE” and “DUP–” appear.

• The repeater receive frequency appears above the func-

tion menu.

• The Split Frequency mode is automatically turned OFF, if

it is ON.

Touch [DUP]( yD) one or more times to switch the off-

set direction.

• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears.

Communicate in the normal way. u

• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit sig-

nal.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Repeater tone icon

Transmit frequency

(Repeater input frequency)

Duplex icon

Touch [DUP] for

1 second

Touch [DUP]

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-28

Previous view

Repeater operation (Continued)

Transmit frequency monitor check D

You may be able to directly receive the other party’s

transmitted signal without having to go through a re-

peater. This function helps you to check whether direct

communication can be made, or not.

While receiving, hold down ➥

XFC

(R) to see if you

can directly receive the other party’s transmitted sig-

nal.

• While holding down

XFC

(R), the duplex direction and

frequency offset are displayed above the function menu.

1750 Hz tone burst D

A 1750 Hz tone is required to access most European

repeaters.

In the FM mode, q

ush

to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit, and then w

touch [TONE](D) during repeater access.

• “1750Hz TONE” appers.

Communicate in the normal way. e

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Hold down

XFC

Duplex direction and frequency offset

Popup window appears

Displays the

transmit fre-

quency

• While hold down

• While hold down [PTT]

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-29

Previous view

Repeater operation (Continued)

D Turning ON the Auto Repeater function

(U.S.A. and Korea versions only)

When the operating frequency falls within the repeater

output frequency range, the Auto Repeater function au-

tomatically sets the repeater settings (duplex ON/OFF,

duplex direction, tone encoder ON/OFF).

Push q

SET

Touch the “Auto Repeater” item of the “Function” Set w

mode.

Function > SPLIT/DUP > Auto Repeater

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired option to turn ON the Auto Re- e

peater function.

U.S.A. version:

• “ON–1” Activates duplex only.

• “ON–2” Activates duplex and tone.

• “OFF” Auto repeater function is turned OFF.

Korea version:

• “ON” Activates duplex and tone.

• “OFF” Auto repeater function is turned OFF.

Push r

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Push

SET

Touch “Function”

Touch

“SPLIT/DUP”

Touch “Auto Re-

peater”

Touch the option

Example: ON

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-30

Previous view

Storing a non standard repeater D

Turn OFF the Auto Repeater function in the “Func- q

tion” Set mode. (p. 4-28)

SET

While the “M-1” menu is selected, touch [A/B]( wD) to

select VFO A.

Rotate the Dial to set the repeater output frequency. e

Touch [A/B]( rD) to select VFO B.

Rotate the Dial to set the repeater input frequency. t

ush

menu), then touch [TONE](D) to turn ON the previ-

ously set tone encoder.

ush

menu), then touch [A/B](D) to select VFO A.

Touch [SPLIT]( iD) to turn ON the Split function.

Rotate [M-CH]( oL) to select the desired memory

channel.

• “BLANK” appears when a blank channel is selected.

• Rotate [BANK](L) to select the desired bank, if needed.

!0 Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to store the set con-

tents into the selected memory channel.

Repeater operation (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [A/B]

Touch [TONE]

Push

(C)

Push

(C)

VFO A

Split icon

VFO B

“M-1” menu

“M-2” menu

Touch [A/B]

Touch [SPLIT]

Touch [MW] for

1 second

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

4-32

Previous view

About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only) D

Operation on the 5 MHz frequency band is allowed on

5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the follow-

ing:

• The USB, USB Data, CW and PSK modes

• Maximum of 100 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)

• 2.8 kHz bandwidth (maximum)

It is your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-

mission in this frequency band meets the stringent con-

ditions under which amateur operations may use these

frequencies.

NOTE: We recommend that you store these frequen-

cies, modes and ﬁ lter settings into memory chan-

nels, for easy recall.

To assist you in operating within the rules speciﬁ ed by the

FCC, transmission is illegal on any frequencies other than

the ﬁ ve shown in the tables at the right.

• For the USB mode

The FCC speciﬁ es center frequencies on the 5 MHz fre-

quency band. However, the transceiver displays carrier

frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to 1.5 kHz

below the speciﬁ ed FCC channel center frequency.

Transceiver Displayed

Frequency

FCC Channel

Center Frequency

5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.35700 MHz 5.35850 MHz

5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz

• For the CW mode

The transceiver displays the center frequency. There-

fore, tune the transceiver to the speciﬁ ed FCC channel

frequency when you operate in the CW mode.

Transceiver Displayed

Frequency

FCC Channel

Center Frequency

5.33200 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34800 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.35850 MHz 5.35850 MHz

5.37300 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40500 MHz 5.40500 MHz

Preamp and attenuator ...........................................................5-2

Preampliﬁ er D .............................................................................5-2

Attenuator D ................................................................................5-2

AGC function ............................................................................5-3

AGC speed selection D ...............................................................5-3

Setting the AGC time constant D ................................................5-3

RIT function ..............................................................................5-4

Twin PBT operation .................................................................5-5

IF ﬁ lter selection ......................................................................5-6

IF ﬁ lter selection D ......................................................................5-6

Filter passband width setting D ................................................... 5-6

IF (DSP) ﬁ lter shape ................................................................5-7

Noise Blanker ...........................................................................5-8

NB Set mode D ...........................................................................5-8

Noise Reduction ......................................................................5-9

Notch function .........................................................................5-10

Auto Notch function D .................................................................5-10

Manual Notch function D .............................................................5-11

Lock function ...........................................................................5-12

Selecting the Lock type D ...........................................................5-12

Meter peak hold function ........................................................5-13

Simple Band Scope .................................................................5-14

5-1

Section 5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Previous view

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-2

Previous view

Preampliﬁ er D

The preampliﬁ er ampliﬁ es weak signals in the receiver

front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity.

Turn ON this function when receiving weak signals.

(Frequency band: HF/50 MHz)

➥ Push

P.AMP

ATT

amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

• Either “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” is displayed when the pre-

amp 1 or preamp 2 is ON.

• No icon is displayed when the preampliﬁ er is OFF.

P.AMP1 Wide dynamic range preampliﬁ er. It is most

effective for the 1.8 to 21 MHz bands.

P.AMP2 High-gain preampliﬁ er. It is most effective

for the 24 to 50 MHz bands.

(Frequency band: 144/430 MHz)

➥ Push

P.AMP

ATT

• “P.AMP” appears when the preampliﬁ er is ON.

• No icon is displayed when it’s OFF.

Attenuator D

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being

distorted when very strong signals are near the signal’s

frequency, or when very strong electromagnetic ﬁ elds,

such as from broadcast stations are near your location.

These can both be independently set for each band.

➥

Hold down

P.AMP

ATT

(C)

for 1 second to turn ON the

Attenuator.

• “ATT” appears on the display when the Attenuator is ON.

➥ Push

P.AMP

ATT

✔ About the “P.AMP2” preampliﬁ er

Preamp 2 is a high gain receive ampliﬁ er. When it is

used in the presence of strong electromagnetic ﬁ elds,

distortion sometimes results. In such cases, use ei-

ther the “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP OFF” setting.

Preamp 2 is most effective when:

• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are

weak.

• Receive sensitivity is insufﬁ cient when using low-

gain antennas, or while using a narrow band an-

tenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a

short Yagi antenna).

About the Preampliﬁ er and Attenuator switching procedure

Push or hold down

P.AMP

ATT

Hold down

Push

ATT ON

Push

P.AMP

OFF

P.AMP

Push

ATT ON

P.AMP

OFF

P.AMP1

P.AMP2

P.AMP

ATT

P.AMP

ATT

P.AMP

ATT

Hold down

P.AMP

ATT

P.AMP

ATT

Push

P.AMP

ATT

• HF/50 MHz frequency bands

• 144/430 MHz frequency bands

Preamp and attenuator

P.AMP

ATT

P.AMP

ATT

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-3

Previous view

The AGC (Auto Gain Control) controls receiver gain to

produce a constant audio output level, even when the

received signal strength greatly varies.

The transceiver has 3 pre-set AGC time constants: fast,

mid and slow for SSB, CW, RTTY and AM modes.

In the FM , WFM and DV modes, the AGC time con-

stant is ﬁ xed as “FAST” (0.1 second).

AGC speed selection D

On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB, q

CW, RTTY or AM mode. (p.3-??)

Push w

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [AGC]( eD)

to select AGC-F (FAST), AGC-M

(MID) or AGC-S (SLOW).

“AGC OFF” appears when the selected AGC speed’s

time constant is set to OFF.

Setting the AGC time constant D

On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB, q

CW, RTTY or AM mode. (p.3-??)

Push w

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [AGC]( eD) for 1 second

display the “AGC”

screen.

Touch either [FAST] r, [MID] or [SLOW](D) to select

the desired AGC speed to be set.

• The selected AGC speed’s time constant is highlighted.

Rotate the Dial to set the selected time constant. t

• AGC time constant can be set to between 0.1 to 8.0 sec-

onds, (depending on the mode) or turned OFF.

• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the

default setting for the selected time constant.

If desired, select another mode (any other than FM, y

WFM or DV), then repeat steps e and r.

Push u

• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: seconds)

Mode Default

Selectable AGC time constant

SSB

0.3 (FAST)

OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,

1.6

, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

2.0 (MID)

6.0 (SLOW)

CW/RTTY

0.1 (FAST)

OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,

1.6

, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

0.5 (MID)

1.2 (SLOW)

3.0 (FAST)

OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6

, 2.0,

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0

5.0 (MID)

7.0 (SLOW)

FM/WFM/DV 0.1 (FAST) Fixed

For your information

When you are receiving a weak signal, and a strong

signal is momentarily received, the AGC function

quickly reduces the receiver gain. When that signal

disappears, the transceiver may not receive the weak

signal because of the AGC action. In that case, hold

down [AGC](D) for 1 second, and rotate the Dial to

set the time constant to OFF.

AGC function

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

• When AGC-M (MID) is selected

• When AGC-F (FAST) is selected

• When AGC-S (SLOW) is selected

Touch [AGC] for

1 second

Selected AGC speed’s time constant display

Selected mode

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-4

Previous view

RIT function

The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function compen-

sates for slight frequency differences between the two

stations.

The function shifts the receive frequency up to

±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps*, without changing the trans-

mit frequency.

* The [M-CH] (L) control tunes in 1 Hz steps when

the operating frequency readout is set to the 1 Hz step

readout.

Push q

RIT

(L) to turn ON the RIT function.

• “RIT” and the frequency shift appear when this function is

ON.

Rotate the [M-CH] w(L) control.

• When the [M-CH] (L) control acts as the RIT control,

the RIT LED lights orange.

If the RIT LED is OFF, push the [M-CH] (L) switch one

or more times to turn it ON.

• Pushing the [M-CH] (L) switch to select the action of

the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls as the Memory/Bank

selection, PBT control or RIT control.

- When the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls act as the PBT

control, the PBT LED lights green.

- When the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls act as the RIT

control, the RIT LED lights orange. (The RIT control is

the inner control. The outer control is disabled.)

- When the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls act as the Mem-

ory/Bank selection, both LEDs are OFF.

• Hold down [CLR] (L) for 1 second to reset the RIT

frequency.

• Hold down

RIT

(L) for 1 second to add the frequency

shift to the operating frequency.

e To cancel the RIT function, push

RIT

(L) again.

• “RIT” and the frequency shift disappear.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

RIT

[M-CH]

[CLR]

RIT LED lights orange

PBT LED lights green

RIT frequency display

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-5

Previous view

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM

)

To reject interference, PBT (Passband Tuning) electron-

ically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF

frequency slightly outside of the IF ﬁ lter passband. The

IC-7100 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving both

TWIN-PBT ([M-CH/BANK] (L)) controls shifts the IF

passband center frequency both above and below the

received frequency.

The LCD graphically shows the passband width and ➥

frequency shift.

Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the “FIL- ➥

TER” screen. The current passband width and fre-

quency shift are displayed.

Hold down [CLR] ➥(L) for 1 second to set the IF

frequency to the center position.

• The “dots” disappear.

The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/CW/

RTTY modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode.

When adjusting, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps

in the SSB/CW/RTTY modes, and 100 Hz in the AM

mode.

• The TWIN-PBT controls should normally be set to

the center positions when there is no interference.

The PBT setting should be cleared.

• When the PBT is used, the audio tone may

change.

• The controls do not function in the FM, WFM and

DV modes.

• While rotating the TWIN-PBT ([M-CH/BANK] (L))

controls, noise may occur. This comes from the

DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment mal-

function.

• Pushing [M-CH]] (L) displays the ﬁ lter passband

width and shift value for 1 second.

Twin PBT operation

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

Both controls in the

center positions

Cutting the lower

passband edge

Cutting both lower and

higher passband edges

PBT OPERATION EXAMPLE

IF center frequency Interference Interference InterferenceDesired signal

Passband Passband

Desired signal

Passband width and shift value are dis-

played while the TWIN PBT is used.

Appear when pass-

band is shifted.

• “FILTER” screen display

• While adjusting the PBT setting

A dot appears when the passband is shifted.

Shows the selected ﬁ lter and passband width.

• About Passband width and Shift value

on the screen

SFT

: Shift value

IF center

frequency

Passband’s

center frequency

: Passband width

( Width of () in which

the two PBTs overlap)

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-6

Previous view

The transceiver has 3 passband width IF ﬁ lters for each

mode.

The ﬁ lter selection is automatically memorized in

each mode.

The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-

rized in each ﬁ lter.

IF ﬁ lter selection D

On the Mode selection screen, select the desired q

mode. (p. 3-??)

Touch the Filter icon one or more times to select IF w

ﬁ lter 1, 2 or 3.

• The selected passband width and ﬁ lter number is dis-

played as the Filter icon.

Filter passband width setting D

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

On the Mode selection screen, select the desired q

mode. (p.3-??)

• Passband widths for FM, WFM and DV modes are ﬁ xed,

and cannot be adjusted.

Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the “FIL- w

TER” screen to adjust the ﬁ lter passband width.

Touch the Filter icon one or more times to select IF e

ﬁ lter 1, 2 or 3.

Touch [BW]( rD), then rotate the Dial to adjust the de-

sired passband width.

Then touch

[BW](D)

to set it.

• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the

default setting.

If desired, select another mode (any other than the t

FM, WFM or DV), then repeat steps w and r.

Push y

Mode IF ﬁ lter Adjustable range (steps)

SSB

FILTER1 (3.0 kHz)

50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)

600 Hz to 3.6 kHz (100 Hz)

FILTER2 (2.4 kHz)

FILTER3 (1.8 kHz)

SSB-D

FILTER1 (1.2 kHz)

50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)

600 to 3600 Hz (100 Hz)

FILTER2 (500 Hz)

FILTER3 (250 Hz)

RTTY

FILTER1 (2.4 kHz)

50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)

600 to 2700 Hz (100 Hz)

FILTER2 (500 Hz)

FILTER3 (250 Hz)

AM-D

FILTER1 (9.0 kHz)

200 Hz to 10 kHz (200 Hz)

FILTER2 (6.0 kHz)

FILTER3 (3.0 kHz)

FM-D

FILTER1 (15 kHz)

Fixed

FILTER2 (10 kHz)

FILTER3 (7.0 kHz)

WFM FILTER (280 kHz) Fixed

IF ﬁ lter selection

When FILTER2 or FILTER3 is selected in the FM

mode, the TX modulation changes to the narrow FM

mode (2.5 kHz).

The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the

passband width is changed.

This “FIL” screen (Filter) graphically displays the PBT

shift frequencies and passband width.

• “FILTER” screen display

• While adjusting the passband width

Filter icon

Passband width and shift value

Blinks Highlighted Highlighted

Touch [BW]

Rotate the Dial to

adjust the pass-

band width, and

then touch [BW]

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-7

Previous view

(Mode: SSB/CW

)

A soft or sharp type of DSP ﬁ lter shape for both SSB

and CW can be independently selected.

On the Mode selection screen, select the SSB or q

CW mode. (p. 3-??)

Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the “FIL- w

TER” screen.

Touch [SHARP] or [SOFT]( eD) to select either the

soft or sharp ﬁ lter shape.

Push r

IF (DSP) ﬁ lter shape

When SHARP is

selected

When SOFT is

selected

Touch [SHARP]

to select SOFT

Touch [SOFT] to

select SHARP

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-8

Previous view

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM

)

The Noise Blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as

noise from car ignitions.

Push ➥

(D) to turn the Noise Blanker function ON

or OFF.

•

“NB” is displayed when the

Noise Blanker

is ON.

When using the Noise Blanker function, received

signals may be distorted if they are excessively

strong or when the function is used for noise other

than pulses. In this case, set the Noise Blanker

threshold level to a shallow position, or turn OFF the

function. (See below.)

Noise Blanker

NB Set mode D

To deal with various types of noise, the attenuation

level and noise blanking duration can be set in the NB

set mode.

Hold down q

screen (Noise blanker).

Touch [ wY] or [Z](D) to select the desired item.

Rotate the Dial eto select the desired option.

• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the

default setting.

Push r

return to the previous screen.

1. NB Level (Default: 50%)

Set the noise blanker threshold level to between 0%

and 100%.

2. NB Depth (Default: 8)

Set the noise attenuation level to between 1 and 10.

3. NB Width (Default: 50)

Set the blanking duration to between 1 and 100.

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

NB icon

Select the item Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-9

Previous view

Noise Reduction

The Noise Reduction function reduces random noise

components and enhances audio signals which are

buried in noise. The received signals are converted to

digital signals and then the audio signals are separated

from the noise.

Push q

• “NR” appears.

Hold down w

screen (Noise Reduction).

Rotate the Dial eto adjust the Noise Reduction lev-

el; rotate it clockwise to increase reduction level or

counterclockwise to decrease reduction level.

• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the

default setting.

• The adjustable reduction level is between 1 and 15.

Push r

exit the

“NR” screen (Noise Reduc-

tion)

• If desired, push

tion.

A large rotation of the “NR control” results in audio

signal masking or distortion. Set the “NR control” for

maximum readability.

Noise reduction ONNoise reduction OFF

Desired

signal (CW)

Noise components

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

NR icon

Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-10

Previous view

(Mode = Auto notch: SSB/AM/FM

Manual notch: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

This transceiver has Auto and Manual Notch functions.

➥

In the SSB or AM mode, push

NOTCH

the Notch function between auto, manual and OFF.

• Either the Auto or Manual notch function can be turned

OFF in the “[NOTCH] switch (SSB)” or “[NOTCH] switch

(AM)” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 165)

SET

In the CW or RTTY mode, push ➥

NOTCH

(C)

to turn

the Manual Notch function ON or OFF.

In the FM mode, push ➥

NOTCH

(C)

to turn the Auto

Notch function ON or OFF.

• “AN” appears when the Auto Notch function is ON.

• “MN” appears when the Manual Notch function is ON.

• No indicator appears when the notch ﬁ lter is OFF.

Auto Notch function D

The Auto Notch function uses DSP to automatically at-

tenuate beat tones, tuning signals, and so on, even if

their frequencies are changing.

Notch function

NOTCH

Auto Notch is OFF Auto Notch is ON

Desired

signal (AF)

Desired

signal (AF)

Unwanted interference Interference frequency

is attenuated

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Auto Notch icon

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-11

Previous view

Manual Notch function D

(Mode = Manual notch: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)

The Manual Notch function allows you to manually at-

tenuate a frequency using the ‘NOTCH control.’

Push q

NOTCH

ual Notch function.

• “MN” appears.

Hold down w

NOTCH

“NOTCH” screen.

• Touch [WIDTH](D) to select the Manual Notch ﬁ lter width,

“WIDE,” “MID” or “NAR.”

Rotate the Dial eto adjust the Notch ﬁ lter frequency.

• Since the Notch ﬁ lter has the very sharp characteristic,

slowly rotate the Dial when adjusting a ﬁ lter.

• If desired, push

NOTCH

exit the

“NOTCH”

screen

Mode Center frequency

SSB

RTTY –1040 Hz to +4040 Hz

CW CW pitch frequency –2540Hz to

CW pitch frequency +2540Hz

AM –5060 Hz to +5100 Hz

Notch function (Continued)

While tuning the manual notch ﬁ lter, noise may be

heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not

indicate an equipment malfunction.

Manual Notch is OFF Manual Notch is ON

Desired

signal (AF)

Desired

signal (AF)

Unwanted interference Interference frequency

is attenuated

NOTCH

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Manual Notch ﬁ lter width

Manual Notch icon

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-12

Previous view

The IC-7100 has two kinds of lock functions; Dial Lock

and Panel Lock. The Dial Lock function locks only the

Dial, and Panel Lock function locks controller opera-

tion.

The Dial Lock function prevents frequency changes by

accidental movement of the Dial by electronically lock-

ing it. To prevent accidental frequency changes and un-

necessary function access, use the Panel Lock func-

tion.

➥ Hold down

SPEECH

(R) to turn the Lock function

ON or OFF.

• “ ” appears when the function is ON.

NOTE: When the “[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch” item of

the “Function” Set mode is set to “LOCK/SPEECH,”

pushing [SPEECH/LOCK] turns ON the Dial Lock

function. (p. 164)

Lock function

SPEECH

Selecting the Lock type D

The Lock function is set to MAIN DIAL by default. The

setting can be changed to PANEL in the “Lock Func-

tion” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 165)

Push q

SET

Touch the “Lock Function” item of the “Function” Set w

mode.

Function > Lock Function

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired option to set the Lock type. e

• MAIN DIAL: Locks only the Dial operation.

• PANEL: Locks the Dial, controls and keys.

SPEECH

(R), [PWR/AF] (L) and [RF/

SQL] (L) can be used while in the Panel

Lock function is ON.

Push r

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Lock icon

Popup window

Touch the option

Example: PANEL

Touch “Function”

Touch

“Lock Function”

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-13

Previous view

Meter peak hold function

Appears for 0.5 seconds.

The Meter Peak hold function is set to ON by default,

the peak level of a received signal strength or the out-

put power is displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds.

The function can be turned OFF in the “Meter Peak

Hold” item of the “Display” Set mode. (p. 165)

Push q

SET

Touch the “Meter Peak Hold” item of the “Display” w

Set mode.

Display > Meter Peak Hold

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired option to turn ON or OFF the Me- e

ter Peak Hold function.

Push r

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch the option

Example: OFF

Push

SET

Touch “Display”

Touch

“Meter Peak Hold”

5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

5-14

Previous view

Simple Band Scope

The Band Scope function allows you to visually check

the location and strength of signals around a speciﬁ ed

frequency.

The IC-7100’s Band Scope function can be used in any

operating mode and any frequency band.

INDICATOR DESCRIPTION

Sweep icon While the band scope is sweeping, “” is displayed; while stopped, “” is displayed.

Received audio is not heard from the speaker while the band scope is sweeping.

Band scope

display

Displays the signal location and strength in relation to the center (displayed) frequency. Signal

strength is relative to the S-meter level, S1 to S9+30 dB, with each vertical dot in the band scope

indicators 1 to 15 dots. Between +30 dB to +60 dB are also displayed by 15 dots. Signal activity is

measured ±30 steps from the center frequency, with each step equal to the selected sweep step.

Frequency

display mark

After a sweep, displays the relative position of the reference frequency. When the reference

frequency is outside of the sweep range, “ ” or “ ” blinks. After changing the frequency, touch

[RCL](D) for 1 second to automatically return to the center frequency.

Sweep step

display

Displays the selected sweep step. Steps of 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 25 kHz are selectable. Each dot

of the band scope display is equal to the selected sweep step.

The band scope displays the receive signal location and

strength over a speciﬁ ed range on either side of a selected

frequency, in either the VFO or memory modes.

Rotate the Dial to select a frequency. q

Push w

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [SCOPE]( eD) for 1 second to display the

“SCOPE” screen (Band Scope).

• Automatically starts sweeping with the previously select-

ed sweeping step.

• During a sweep, received signals cannot be heard.

Touch [STEP]( rD) one or more times to select the

desired sweep step.

• 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 25 kHz are selectable.

Touch [ t](D) to start sweeping, then automati-

cally stop after sweeping.

• Touch [](D) for 1 second to start continuous sweep-

ing. In this case, touch [](D) to stop the sweeping.

• During a sweep, “” is displayed but received signals

cannot be heard.

• If there is a lot of signal noise, turn OFF the Preampliﬁ er

to reduce the signal input level, and, if necessary, turn

ON the Attenuator to improve the readability of the band

scope.

Rotate the Dial to ﬁ nd a signal that you wish to com- y

municate with. If you ﬁ nd the signal, communicate in

the normal way.

• If you want to return to the frequency you were using

before rotating the Dial, touch [RCL](D) for 1 second.

• If the selected frequency is set outside of the sweep

range, “ ” or “ ” blinks.

If you want to update the band conditions while re- u

ceiving, repeat steps r and t.

NOTE:

If you select a large sweep step, a wide frequency

range can be displayed on the band scope, but some

signals may be skipped and not displayed.

Touch [SCOPE]

Band scope display

Sweep start/stop Sweep step selection

Sweep icon

Sweep step

display

Frequency display mark

Blinks when the reference frequency

is outside of the sweep range.

VOX function ............................................................................6-2

Using the VOX function D ...........................................................6-2

Adjusting the VOX function D ......................................................6-2

Break-in function .....................................................................6-3

Semi Break-in operation D ..........................................................6-3

Full Break-in operation D ............................................................6-4

Speech compressor function .................................................6-5

Transmit ﬁ lter width selection ................................................6-6

Monitor function ......................................................................6-7

Split frequency operation .......................................................6-8

Direct frequency shift input D ...................................................... 6-9

Split Lock function D ...................................................................6-10

Quick Split function .................................................................6-11

Split frequency offset setting D ...................................................6-12

Measuring SWR .......................................................................6-13

Spot measurement D ..................................................................6-13

Plot measurement D ...................................................................6-14

SWR Graph Set mode D .............................................................6-16

DTMF Memory encoder ...........................................................6-17

Programming a DTMF code D ....................................................6-17

Transmitting DTMF code D .........................................................6-18

Transmitting DTMF code (Direct Input) D ...................................6-19

Setting DTMF transfer speed D ..................................................6-20

6-1

Section 6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

Previous view

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-2

Previous view

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/DV)

The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function

switches the transceiver between transmit and receive

with your voice. This function provides hands-free op-

eration.

Using the VOX function D

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35) q

On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB, w

AM, FM or DV mode. (p.3-??)

Push e

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [VOX]( rD)

to turn ON the VOX function.

• “VOX” appears.

VOX function

1. VOX Gain (Default: 50%)

Adjust the VOX gain to between 0% and 100%, in 1%

steps.

Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive

to your voice.

2. Anti-VOX (Default: 50%)

Adjust the ANTI-VOX gain to between 0% and 100%,

in 1% steps.

Higher values make the VOX function less sensitive to

the received audio from a speaker or headphones.

3. VOX Delay (Default: 0.2sec)

Set the VOX delay to between 0.0 and 2.0 seconds, for

normal pauses in speech before returning to receive.

Adjusting the VOX function D

On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB, q

AM, FM or DV mode. (p.3-??)

Push w

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [VOX]( eD) for 1 second to display the “VOX”

screen

Touch [ rY] or [Z](D) to select the desired item.

Rotate the Dial tto select the desired option.

• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the

default setting.

Push y

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display VOX icon

Touch [VOX]

Select the item Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-3

Previous view

Break-in function

(Mode: CW

)

The Break-in function is used in the CW mode to auto-

matically toggle the transceiver between transmit and

receive when keying. The IC-7100 is capable of Full

Break-in or Semi Break-in.

Semi Break-in operation D

During Semi Break-in operation, the transceiver imme-

diately transmits when you key down, then returns to

receive after a preset delay time has passed after you

stop keying.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the CW or w

CW-R mode. (p.3-??)

Push e

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [BK-IN]( rD) one or more times

to turn ON the

Semi Break-in function.

• “BKIN” appears.

When the “M-3” screen (M-3 menu) is selected, t

touch [BK-IN](D) for 1 second to display the “BK-IN”

screen.

Touch [ yY] or [Z](D) to select the desired item.

Rotate the Dial uto select the desired option.

• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the

default setting.

Push i

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [BK-IN]

Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

Semi Break-in icon

Shows break-in delay time

Touch [BK-IN]

for 1 second

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-4

Previous view

Break-in function (Continued)

Push q

SPEED/PITCH

adjustment window.

Rotate [M-CH] w(L) to adjust the Key speed.

• The adjustable key speed is between 6 and 48 wpm

(words per minute).

Push e

SPEED/PITCH

[M-CH]

When using a paddle:

Adjust the keying speed while operating a paddle.

Full Break-in operation D

During Full Break-in operation, the transceiver trans-

mits when you key down, then immediately returns to

receive when you release.

On the Mode selection screen, select the CW or q

CW-R mode. (p.3-??)

Push w

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [BK-IN]( eD) one or more times

to turn ON the

Full Break-in function.

• “F-BKIN” appears. Full Break-in icon

Touch [BK-IN]

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-5

Previous view

Speech compressor function

(Mode: SSB

)

The Speech Compressor function increases average

RF output power, improving signal strength and read-

ability.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the USB or w

LSB mode. (p.3-??)

Before ﬁ rst tuning ON the Speech compressor, adjust e

the microphone gain so that the ALC meter reading

stays within the ALC zone.

q Push

MIC/RF PWR

power adjustment display.

w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the MIC gain.

• To adjust the MIC gain, touch the TX meter to select

the ALC meter.

e Push

Push r

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [COMP]( tD)

to turn ON the Speech Compres-

sor.

• “COMP” appears.

Touch [COMP]( yD) for 1 second

to display the “COMP”

(Compressor) screen.

While speaking into the microphone at your normal u

voice level, rotate the Dial so that the COMP meter

reading stays within the COMP level zone (10 dB to

20 dB zone).

• To adjust the COMP level, touch the TX meter to select

the COMP meter.

• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default

setting.

When the COMP meter peaks above the COMP

level zone, your transmitted voice may be distort-

ed.

Push i

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [COMP]

Touch for 1 second

to reset to default

Touch [COMP]

for 1 second

Speech Compressor icon

Shows the compression level

COMP level zone

(10 dB to 20 dB)

COMP meter

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-6

Previous view

Transmit ﬁ lter width selection

(Mode: SSB

)

The transmit ﬁ lter width for the SSB mode can be se-

lected from Wide, Mid or Narrow. This setting can be

memorized each for the Speech Compressor ON and

OFF.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the USB or w

LSB mode. (p.3-??)

Push e

“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).

Touch [COMP]( rD)

to turn ON the Speech Compres-

sor.

• “COMP” appears.

Touch [TBW]( tD) for 1 second one or more times a

Wide, Mid or Narrow transmission passband width

• Touch [TBW](D) to display the selected TX ﬁ lter width for

approximately 1 second.

• The following ﬁ lters are speciﬁ ed as the defaults. Each of

the ﬁ lter widths can be set in the “TBW” items of the “Tone

Control” Set mode. (p. 165)

SET

> TBW (WIDE), TBW (MID), TBW (NAR)

- WIDE: 100 Hz to 2900 Hz

- MID: 300 Hz to 2700 Hz

- NAR: 500 Hz to 2500 Hz

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [TBW] for

1 second

Push

The selected transmit ﬁ lter width is

displayed for approximately 1 second.

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-7

Previous view

Monitor function

The Monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-

mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice

characteristics while adjusting transmit parameters.

The CW sidetone functions regardless of the “Monitor”

setting.

Push q

SET

Touch the “Monitor” item of the “Function” Set mode. w

Function > Monitor

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the option to turn ON the function. e

Touch the “Monitor Level” item of the “Function” Set r

mode.

Function > Monitor Level

Rotate the Dial to adjust the monitor level. t

• For the clearest audio output, adjust while holding

down [PTT] and speaking into the microphone.

• The adjustable monitor level is between 0% (minimum

audio level) and 100% (maximum audio level).

• If desired, touch the level bar for 1 second to open the

Default set window, then select “Default” to reset to the

default setting.

Push y

SET

Monitor ON/OFF

Monitor level

Touch

“Function”

Push

SET

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-8

Previous view

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Split frequency operation

Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and

receive on two different frequencies. Split frequency

operation is performed using frequencies in VFO A and

VFO B.

• The Split frequency operation is automatically turned OFF

when turning ON the One-touch repeater function.

The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz/

USB mode for receiving and 21.310 MHz/USB mode

for transmitting.

Set 21.290 MHz in VFO A and select the USB q

mode.

Push w

“M-1” screen (M-1 menu).

Touch [SPLIT]( eD)

to turn ON the

Split function

• The transmit frequency (VFO B) and “SPLIT” appear.

• If desired, tap [SPLIT](D) again to turn OFF the func-

tion.

Set 21.310 MHz in VFO B and select the USB mode. r

The setting method has the three following ways.

(1) While holding down

XFC

(R) in VFO A, rotate the

Dial to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz

in VFO B, and then select the operating mode to

USB.

• While holding down

XFC

(R), you can change the

frequency band and operating mode in VFO B.

• While holding down

XFC

(R), the transceiver re-

ceives the transmit frequency in VFO B.

(2) Touch [A/B](D) to select VFO B, rotate the Dial

to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz, and

then select the operating mode to USB.

(3) Use the Quick Split function.

• The Quick Split function is much more convenient for

selecting the transmit frequency. See the next content

for details.

t Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit on

21.310 MHz.

To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push

[A/B] to exchange VFO A and VFO B.

• While holding down

XFC

• After setting up

Split icon

Touch [SPLIT]

Shows the transmit frequency (VFO B)

Shows the frequency shift and direction

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-9

Previous view

Split frequency operation (Continued)

Direct frequency shift input D

The frequency shift can directly be entered.

Touch the MHz digits to enter the Band selection dis- q

play.

Touch [F-INP]( wD) to enter the Direct input screen.

If the Shift direction is minus, touch “• (–).” e

• [SPLIT] changes to [–SPLIT], and displays the Minus set-

ting mode.

Touch the desired number to enter the desired fre- r

quency shift.

• –9.999 to +9.999 MHz can be set in 1 kHz steps.

Touch [SPLIT] or [–SPLIT]( tD) to input the frequency

shift to the transmit frequency, and the Split function

is turned ON.

[Example]

To transmit on a 10 kHz higher frequency:

Touch [1], [0] then [SPLIT]. ➥

To transmit on 1.025 MHz lower frequency:

Touch [• (–)], [1], [0], [2], [5] then [–SPLIT]. ➥

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

• Direct input screen

Minus (–) input Delete entering

Enter the Split off-

set

Cancel edit

Shows the input

digits

Touch the MHz

digits.

Touch [F-INP]

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-10

Previous view

Split frequency operation (Continued)

Split Lock function D

The Split Lock function is convenient for changing only

the transmit frequency. When the Split Lock function is

not used, accidentally releasing

XFC

(R)

while rotating

the Dial, changes the receive frequency.

The Split Lock function is OFF by default, but can be

turned ON

in the

“SPLIT LOCK” item of the

“Function”

Set mode. (p. 165)

• Setting

Push q

SET

Touch the “SPLIT LOCK” item of the “Function” Set w

mode.

Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT LOCK

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the option to turn ON the function. e

Push r

SET

• Operation

While Split frequency operation is ON, hold down q

SPEECH

(R) for 1 second to activate the split lock

function.

• “ ” appears.

While holding down w

XFC

(R), rotate the Dial to

change the transmit frequency.

• If you accidentally release

XFC

(R) while rotating the

Dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.

SPEECH

XFC

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch

“Function”

Touch

“SPLIT/DUP”

Touch

“SPLIT LOCK”

Push

SET

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-11

Previous view

Quick Split function

When you touch [SPLIT](D) for 1 second, the Split fre-

quency operation is turned ON. The undisplayed VFO

is automatically changed according to the plus/minus

frequency shift programmed in the “SPLIT Offset” item

of the “Function” Set mode (p. 165). Or the VFOs are

equalized when 0.000 MHz (default setting) is pro-

grammed as the Split Offset (p. 165).

SET

The Quick Split function is ON by default. For your con-

venience, it can be turned OFF in the

“Quick SPLIT”

item of the

“Function” Set mode (p. 165). In this case,

touch [SPLIT](D) for 1 second does not equalize the

VFO A and VFO B frequencies.

SET

Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in q

VFO A.

Push w

“M-1” screen (M-1 menu).

Touch [SPLIT]( eD) for 1 second

• Split frequency operation is turned ON.

• The transmit (VFO B) frequency is equalized to the re-

ceive (VFO A) frequency.

While holding down r

XFC

(R), rotate the Dial to set

the frequency offset between transmit and receive.

• When

XFC

(R) is released, the receive frequency is dis-

played.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

The example shows the split offset

is set to +20 kHz (+0.020 MHz).

• While holding down

XFC

Split icon

Shows the transmit frequency (VFO B)

Shows the frequency shift and direction

Touch [SPLIT]

for 1 second

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-12

Previous view

Quick Split function (Continued)

Split frequency offset setting D

By setting an often-used split frequency offset in ad-

vance, you can use the Quick Split function to select split

operation at the touch of one key.

Push q

SET

Touch the “SPLIT Offset” item of the “Function” Set w

mode.

Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT Offset

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the number to enter the desired frequency e

shift, and then touch [ENT](D).

• –9.999 to +9.999 MHz can be set in 1 kHz steps.

Push r

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch

“Function”

Touch

“SPLIT/DUP”

Touch

“SPLIT Offset”

Push

SET

Enter the decimal point

Move the cursor

Select a direc-

tion

Enter

Cancel edit

Delete entering

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-13

Previous view

Measuring SWR

The IC-7100 has a built-in circuit for measuring antenna

SWR— no external equipment or special adjustments

are necessary.

The IC-7100 can measure SWR two ways— spot mea-

surement and plot measurement.

Spot measurement D

This function is convenient to use when measuring

SWR of the antenna to install or periodic check.

q If desired, push

TUNER/CALL

(L) once or twice to turn

OFF the antenna tuner.

• If the antenna tuner is connected, and your want to mea-

sure SWR of the antenna itself, perform this step.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) w

On the Mode selection screen, select the RTTY or e

RTTY-R mode. (p.3-??)

If necessary, adjust the RF power to more than 30 W r

on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.

• If your are operating in the 144 MHz band, adjust the RF

power to more than 20 W.

• If your are operating in the 430 MHz band, adjust the RF

power to more than 15 W.

q Push

MIC/RF PWR

power adjustment display.

w Rotate [BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.

e Push

Before transmitting, monitor the operating fre-

quency to make sure transmitting won’t cause

interference to other stations on the same fre-

quency.

Touch the TX meter one or more times to select the t

SWR meter.

Hold down [PTT] on the microphone or switch ON y

the external TX switch to transmit.

Read the SWR on the SWR meter. u

• If the SWR meter points 1.5 or less, the antenna is

matched .

Release [PTT] or Switch OFF the external TX switch i

to receive.

• When the measured SWR is more than 1.5:1, adjust the

antenna to match with the transceiver.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

NOTE

This transceiver can measure SWR in the 144 MHz or

430 MHz bands.

Depending on the length of the connected coaxial

cable, or installation condition, the measurement may

be different from the actual SWR of the antenna in

these band.

The best match is in this range.

(1.5 or less)

SWR meter

RTTY mode icon

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-14

Previous view

Plot measurement D

Plot measurement allows you to measure the SWR

over an entire band.

Measuring SWR (Continued)

INDICATOR DESCRIPTION

Measurement

start icon

Touch [](D) to start the measuring. While measuring, “” is displayed. The measured fre-

quency is displayed by the frequency display mark, “∫,” below the graph bar. While measuring

SWR, the frequency cannot be changed. When quieting the SWR measurement, the frequency

returns to the previous frequency before starting the SWR measurement.

Graph bar

display

Each vertical dot indicates the SWR value, and horizontal bar indicates the number of measure-

ment steps. The measurement steps can be selected the “Number of Graph Bar” item of the

“SWR GRAPH SET” screen.

SWR graph displays SWR 1 to 3 vertically, and many dots indicates the worse SWR.

(SWR is displayed 1.0=1 dot, 1.5=10 dots, 2.0=19 dots and 3.0=28 dots.)

Frequency

display mark Displays the relative position of the measurement frequency.

SWR measur-

ing step

Displays the selected SWR measuring step.

Set the “Measuring Step” item of the “SWR GRAPH SET” screen.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

SWR measuring

step

Shows starting

measurement Shows the graph bar

Frequency display mark

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-15

Previous view

Measuring SWR

Plot measurement (Continued) D

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the RTTY or w

RTTY-R mode. (p.3-??)

If necessary, adjust the RF power to more than 30 W e

on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.

• If your are operating in the 144 MHz band, adjust the RF

power to more than 20 W.

• If your are operating in the 430 MHz band, adjust the RF

power to more than 15 W.

q Push

MIC/RF PWR

power adjustment display.

w Rotate [BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.

Before transmitting, monitor the operating fre-

quency to make sure transmitting won’t cause

interference to other stations on the same fre-

quency.

Push r

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [SWR]( tD) to display the “SWR” (SWR Graph)

screen.

Set the center frequency for the SWR to be mea- y

sured.

If necessary, touch [SET]( uD) to enter the “SWR

GRAPH SET” screen to set the Number of graph bar

or Measuring step.

• The selectable number of graph bar are 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and

13.

• The selectable measuring steps are 10k, 50k, 100k and

500 kHz.

• Touch [](D) or push

ous screen.

Touch [ i](D) to start the measuring.

• A frequency marker, “∫,” appears below the left edge of

the graph bars and displays the frequency.

Hold down [PTT] on the microphone or switch ON o

the external TX switch to transmit.

• The bar graph displays the SWR.

!0 Release [PTT] or Switch OFF the external TX switch

to receive.

• The frequency marker moves to, and frequency display

changes to the next frequency to be measured.

!1 Repeat steps o and !0 to measure SWR over the

entire frequency range.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [SWR]

Touch []

Measuring SWR

While measuring SWR, the frequency cannot be changed

Frequency display mark

The best match is in this range. (1.5 or less)

Push

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-16

Previous view

SWR Graph Set mode D

Push q

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

Touch [SWR]( wD) to display the “SWR” (SWR Graph)

screen.

Touch [SET]( eD) to enter the “SWR GRAPH SET”

screen.

Touch the desired item to select. r

• See below for details of the set items and options.

Touch the tdesired option to change the setting.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the De-

fault set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the

default setting.

Touch [ y](D) or push

“SWR” (SWR Graph) screen.

Push u

(C)

to return to the “M-3” screen

(Menu 3)

Measuring SWR (Continued)

Number of Graph Bar (Default: 5)

Select the number of the graph bar for the displayed

SWR Graph.

• The selectable number are 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13.

Measuring Step (Default: 10k)

Select the SWR measuring step for the center frequen-

cy.

• The selectable steps are 10k, 50k, 100k and 500

kHz.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [SET]

Touch the item

Touch [SWR]

Push

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-17

Previous view

DTMF Memory encoder

DTMF tones are used for autopatching, controlling oth-

er equipment, and so on. The transceiver has 16 DTMF

memory channels for storage of often-used DTMF

codes sequence of up to 24 digits.

Programming a DTMF code D

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV w

mode. (p.3-??)

• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.

Push e

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

• If your are operating in the DR mode, push

(C)

once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).

Touch [DTMF]( rD)

to display the DTMF mode.

• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.

Touch [EDIT]( tD) to display the “DTMF MEMORY”

screen.

Touch the desired channel to select. y

• “d0” to “d9,” “dA” to “dD,” “d½” and “d#” are selectable.

Touch the unumber or character to enter the desired

DTMF code.

After entering the DTMF codes, touch [ENT]( iD) to

save the channel, and return to the “DTMF MEMO-

RY” screen.

Touch [ o](D) or push

“DTMF” screen.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Move the cursor

Delete a number

Enter

Cancel edit

Touch [ENT]

Touch [EDIT]

Touch [DTMF]

Touch the channel

Example “d0”

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-18

Previous view

Transmitting DTMF code D

To transmit DTMF code using a DTMF send window,

program the desired code in advance.

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV w

mode. (p.3-??)

• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.

Push e

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

• If your are operating in the DR mode, push

(C)

once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).

Touch [DTMF]( rD)

to display the DTMF mode.

• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.

Touch [SEND]( tD) to open the DTMF send window.

Touch the desired channel to transmit the DTMF y

code.

• The transceiver automatically transmits the selected

DTMF code.

• While transmitting, touch [SEND], [EDIT] or [SET](D)

or push

(C),

SET

XFC

(R), cancels the

transmission.

• After transmitting, transceiver returns to the “DTMF”

screen.

DTMF memory encoder (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [SEND]

Touch [DTMF]

The DTMF code scrolls to the

left edge, and disappears every

one digit when the each digit is

sent.

Highlighted

while transmitting

Touch the DTMF

channel

Example: d0

• While transmitting

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-19

Previous view

Transmitting DTMF code (Direct Input) D

Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5) q

On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV w

mode. (p.3-??)

• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.

Push e

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

• If your are operating in the DR mode, push

(C)

once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).

Touch [DTMF]( rD)

to display the DTMF mode.

• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.

Touch [SEND]( tD) to open the DTMF send window.

Touch “Direct Input” to display the “DTMF DIRECT y

INPUT” screen.

Touch the unumber or character to enter the desired

DTMF code.

When all digit are set, touch [TX]( iD) to transmit the

code.

• The transceiver automatically transmits the DTMF code.

• While transmitting, touch [SEND], [EDIT] or [SET](D)

or push

(C),

SET

XFC

(R), cancels the

transmission.

• After transmitting, transceiver returns to the “DTMF”

screen.

DTMF memory encoder (Continued)

The DTMF code scrolls to the

left edge, and disappears every

one digit when the each digit is

sent.

Highlighted

while transmitting

• While transmitting

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Move the cursor

Delete a number

Transmit the code

Cancel edit

Touch [TX]

Touch [SEND]

Touch [DTMF]

Touch

“Direct Input”

6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

6-20

Previous view

Setting DTMF transfer speed D

The DTMF transfer speed can be selected.

On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV q

mode. (p.3-??)

• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.

Push w

“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).

• If your are operating in the DR mode, push

(C)

once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).

Touch [DTMF]( eD)

to display the DTMF mode.

• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.

Touch [SET]( rD) to enter the “DTMF SET” mode.

Touch “DTMF Speed” to enter the “DTMF Speed” set t

screen.

Touch the desired option to change the setting. y

• 100ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 100 millisec-

onds per code.

5 characters per second.

• 200ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 200 millisec-

onds per code.

2.5 characters per second.

• 300ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 300 millisec-

onds per code.

1.6 characters per second.

• 500ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 500 millisec-

onds per code.

1 character per second.

• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default

set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the de-

fault setting.

Touch [ u](D) or push

“DTMF” screen.

DTMF memory encoder (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [SET]

Touch [DTMF]

Touch the item

Touch the option

Example: 300 ms

Example: Set the DTMF transfer speed to 300 millisec-

onds.

7-1

Section 7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

Previous view

IMPORTANT!

• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.

• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are dif-

ferent from other country’s.

Be sure to add a repeater node letter as the 8th digit in the call sign ﬁ eld after a repeater call sign, according to

the repeater frequency band, as shown below.

1200 MHz: A (B in Japan)

430 MHz: B (A in Japan)

144 MHz: C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)

“MY” (Your own call sign) programming .............................7-2

D-STAR Intoroduction ...........................................................7-5

About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode ..............................7-6

Communication Form in the DR mode ................................7-7

7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

7-2

Previous view

IMPORTANT!

Before starting D-STAR, the following steps are needed.

STEP 1 Entering your call sign (MY) into the transceiver. STEP 2 Registering your call sign

(MY) to a gateway repeater. You have completed the steps!!

“MY” (Your own call sign) programming

You can store up to 6 “MY” call signs.

Example: Enter “JA3YUA” as your own call sign into the

MY call sign memory [MY1].

Display the My Call Sign Edit screen1.

Push q

SET

Touch the “MY Call Sign” item of the “My Station” Set w

mode.

(My Station > MY Call Sign)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired call sign memory for 1 second. e

(Example: 1:)

Touch the “Edit” item. r

• “MY CALL SIGN (MYM)” screen appears.

The memory number, selected in the step e, is dis-

played.

(Example: MY1)

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the part of

the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Continued on the next page ☞

Touch [√]

Touch

“My Station”

Touch

“MY Call Sign”

Touch the call

sign memory

for 1 second

(Example: 1:)

Touch

“Edit”

7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

7-3

Previous view

Enter the Call Sign2.

Touch the desired block one or more times to select t

the desired character or symbol.

(Example: J)

• A to Z, 0 to 9 and / are selectable.

• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input

and Number input mode.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

• Touch “” to input a space.

Touch [ y](D) to move the cursor backwards, or

touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.

Repeat steps ut and y to enter your own call sign of

up to 8 characters, including spaces.

(Example: First J, then A, then 3, then Y, then U, then A)

Touch [ENT]( iD) to return to the “MY CALL SIGN”

screen.

“MY” (Your own call sign) programming (Continued)

Call sign edit screen

Input a space

Move the cursor

Delete a character

Select an input mode

Enter

Cancel edit

Number input mode is selected.

Alphabet input mode is selected.

Enter “JA3YUA” into [MY1].

q Touch [JKL]

to enter ‘J.’

w Touch [ABC]

to enter ‘A.’

e Touch

[AB12].

o Touch [ENT]

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Continued on the next page ☞

r Touch [3]

to enter ‘3.’

t Touch

[AB12].

y Touch [WXYZ]

three times

to enter ‘Y.’

u Touch [TUV]

two times

to enter ‘U.’

i Touch [ABC]

to enter ‘A.’

7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

7-4

Previous view

“MY” (Your own call sign) programming

Convenient! ✓

If necessary, enter a note of up to 4 characters, such as

the model of the transceiver, name, area name, and so

on, after your call sign.

Touch [ q](D) one or more times until the cursor

moves to the right of the “/”.

Repeat steps wt and y on the page 7-3 to enter a

desired 4 character note.

(Example: 7100)

Touch

SET

Appears

Touch the entered call sign to set the call sign to be o

used.

!0 Push

SET

2. Enter the Call Sign (Continued) The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Important! ✓

To use a repeater gateway, you must register your call

sign with a gateway repeater, usually one near your

home location.

If needed, ask the gateway repeater administrator for

call sign registration instructions.

Touch the

call sign

( Example:

1:JA3YUA)

7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

7-5

Previous view

• In the original D-STAR (Digital Smart Technologies for

Amateur Radio) plan, JARL envisioned a system of

repeaters grouped together into Zones.

• The D-STAR repeater enables you to call a HAM sta-

tion in another area through the internet.

• The transceiver can be operated in the digital voice

mode, including low-speed data operation, for both

transmit and receive. It has a built-in GPS receiver to

transmit and receive position data.

D-STAR Intoroduction

7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

7-6

Previous view

The DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode is one mode you can

use for D-STAR repeater operation. In this mode, you

can select the preprogrammed repeater or frequency in

“FROM” (the access repeater or simplex), and UR call

NOTE: If the repeater, set to “FROM” (Access Re-

peater) has no Gateway call sign, you cannot make

a gateway call.

Destination

(Repeater/Station)

Access repeater

or Simplex

In the DR mode

About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode

7D-STAR INTRODUCTION

7-7

Previous view

In the DR mode, the transceiver has three communica-

tion forms, as shown below.

• Local area call: To call through your local area (ac-

cess) repeater.

• Gateway call: To call through your local area (ac-

cess) repeater, repeater gateway and

the internet to your destination re-

peater or individual station’s last used

repeater, using call sign routing.

• Simplex call: To call another station not using a re-

peater.

NOTE:

• Programming the repeater list is required for DR mode operation. (pp. ??-?? to ??-??)

• Before operating in the DV mode, be sure to check whether the repeater is busy, or not. If the repeater is busy,

wait until it is clear, or ask for a “break” using a method acceptable to your local procedures.

• The transceiver has a Time-Out Timer function for digital repeater operation. The timer limits a continuous trans-

mission to approximately 10 minutes. Warning beeps will sound approximately 30 seconds before time-out and

then again immediately before time-out.

Communication Form in the DR mode

INTERNET

Local area call

Access repeater

Hamacho

repeater

Hamacho area

Gateway call Hirano

repeater

Hirano area

Sapporo

repeater

Sapporo area

Simplex call

11-1

Section 11 MEMORY OPERATION

Previous view

11-1

General description ...............................................................11-2

Memory channel contents

D .....................................................11-2

Selecting a Memory channel ................................................11-3

Selecting in the VFO mode

D ...................................................11-3

Selecting in the Memory mode

D ..............................................11-3

Selecting a Call channel .......................................................11-4

Programming a Memory channel ........................................11-5

Programming in the VFO mode

D .............................................11-5

Programming in the Memory mode

D .......................................11-5

Programming the Call channels

D ............................................11-5

Clearing a Memory channel ..................................................11-7

Copying Memory contents ...................................................11-8

Copying in the Memory mode

D ...............................................11-8

Copy

Ding in the VFO mode .....................................................11-8

Programming a Memory name ............................................11-9

Selecting a Memory display type .........................................11-11

Memo pad function ................................................................11-12

Writing the displayed contents into the Memo pads

D ..............11-12

Calling up the

DMemo pads.....................................................11-13

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-2

Previous view

The transceiver has a total of 495 Memory channels (99

channels in each of 5 memory banks, A to E), 6 Scan

Edge channels (3 pairs) and two Call channels (C1/C2)

each for the 144 and 430 MHz frequency bands.

The Memory mode is useful to quickly select often-

used frequencies.

While in the memory mode, all 503 Memory channels

are tunable, which means the programmed frequency

can be temporarily tuned with the Dial.

When you tune a Memory channel without storing, and

then go back to the channel again, the original stored

frequency is displayed.

In the Memory mode, touch just above MHz area on

the display, and then select the desired band. Then ro-

tate the Dial to select the frequency to be stored.

Memory Channels Descriptions

1–99 (Total of 495) Regular Memory channels with split frequency capability.

1A/1B–3A/3B Program Scan Edge Memory channels with only simplex capability.

Stores the Scan Edge frequencies for programmed scans.

C1/C2 Two Call channels (C1/C2) each for the 144 and 430 MHz frequency bands.

Call channel with split frequency capability. Instantly recalls a speciﬁ ed frequency.

Memory channel contents D

The following information can be programmed into

Memory channels:

• Operating frequency (p. ??-??)

• Operating mode (p. ??-??)

• IF ﬁ lter number (p. ??-??)

• Split data (p. ??-??)

( Usable only on the regular Memory channels and

Call channels.)

• Memory name (p. ??-??)

• Duplex direction (DUP+ or DUP–) and frequency off-

set (pp. ??-??)

• Subaudible tone encoder (p. ??-??), tone squelch or

DTCS squelch ON/OFF (pp. ??-??, ??-??)

• Subaudible tone frequency (p. ??-??), tone squelch

frequency or DTCS code with polarity (p. ??-??)

• Destination call sign (p. ??-??)

• R1/R2 call signs (p. ??-??)

• Call sign squelch or Digital code squelch ON/OFF (p.

??-??)

• Digital code (p. ??-??)

NOTE:

Memory content can be erased by static electricity,

electric transients, and other causes. In addition, they

can be erased by a malfunction or during repairs.

Therefore, we recommend that you backup the mem-

ory content or save it to a SD card or to a PC.

• The SD card is not available from Icom. Purchase a

SD card to meet your needs.

• The optional CS-7100 CLONING SOFTWARE can also

be used to backup your memory data.

General description

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-3

Previous view

Selecting in the VFO mode D

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [BANK]( wL) to select a Memory bank that

contains the channel you want to select.

Rotate [M-CH]( eL) to select a Memory channel num-

ber.

• Rotate clockwise to select a higher Memory channel

number; rotate counterclockwise to select a lower Mem-

ory channel number.

• All Memory channels, including blank channels, can be

selected.

• “BLANK” appears when no information has been pro-

grammed into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)

• You can do either step r or t ﬁ rst.

NOTE: When the PBT indicator lights green, or

the RIT indicator lights orange, push [M-CH](L)

to turn OFF the indicator ﬁ rst, and then rotate it.

Touch the Memory channel number indication to se- r

lect the Memory mode.

• “MEMO” and the Memory channel contents appear.

Selecting in the Memory mode D

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [BANK]( wL) to select a Memory bank that

contains the channel you want to select.

Rotate [M-CH]( eL) to select a Memory channel num-

ber.

• Rotate clockwise to select a higher Memory channel

number; rotate counterclockwise to select a lower Mem-

ory channel number.

• All Memory channels, including blank channels, can be

selected.

• “BLANK” appears when no content has been programmed

into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)

• Memory channels can also be selected using the micro-

phone [UP]/[DN] keys. In such case, the blank channels

are skipped.

While in the VFO mode

While in the Memory mode

Appears

Outer: [BANK]

Inner: [M-CH]

Selecting a Memory channel

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-4

Previous view

Two Call channels (C1/C2) are selectable in each of the

144 and 430 MHz frequency bands.

Factory default frequencies and operating modes are

programmed into the Call channels. Change these to

suit your operating needs. (see page ??)

Select qthe 144 or 430 MHz frequency band. (p. ??-

??)

Push w

TUNER/CALL

(L) to select the Call channel of the

selected frequency band.

• “CALL1” appears.

• Rotate [M-CH] to select “CALL2.”

Push e

TUNER/CALL

(L) again to return to the previous

screen display.

While in the Call channel mode

Appears

TUNER/CALL

Selecting a Call channel

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-5

Previous view

Memory channels can be programmed in either the

VFO mode or the Memory mode.

NOTE: If you perform the operations as described

below in a pre-programmed channel, the previous

channel content will be overwritten.

Programming in the VFO mode D

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

Set the desired contents into VFO A or VFO B. w

Rotate [BANK]( eL) or [M-CH](L) to select the Mem-

ory channel to be programmed.

• “BLANK” appears when no content has been programmed

into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)

Touch [MW]( rD) for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Memory channel.

Programming in the Memory mode D

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [M-CH]( wL) to select the Memory channel to

be programmed.

• The contents of the Memory channel appear in the dis-

play.

• “BLANK” appears if the selected Memory channel is a

blank channel.

Set the desired contents into the Memory channel. e

• When a blank channel is selected, touch just above MHz

area on the display, and then select the desired band.

Rotate the Dial to select the frequency. (p. ??)

Touch [MW]( rD) for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Memory channel.

Programming the Call channels D

It is convenient to program often-used frequencies into

the Call channels for quick recall.

Rotate [M-CH]( qL) to select a Call channel.

• A capital “C” appears.

Set the desired contents into the channel. w

Touch [MW]( eD) for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Call channel.

IMPORTANT!

When a Call channel is selected by pushing

TUNER/CALL

(L), you cannot change the memory contents. How-

ever, when a Call channel is selected using [M-CH]

in the VFO or Memory mode, the memory contents

can be changed.

The 144 MHz frequency band can be programmed

into the 144 “C1” or C2,” and the 430 MHz frequency

band can be programmed into the 430 “C1” or C2.”

While in the Memory mode

[Example]:

Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into Memory

channel 12 while in the VFO mode.

[Example]:

Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into Mem-

ory channel 18 while in the Memory mode.

Programming a Memory channel

Appears

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-6

Previous view

Programming a Memory channel (Continued)

Programming in the DR mode D

Push q

to select the DR mode. (p. ??-??)

Set the desired contents. w(p. ??-??)

Push eMENU (C) one or more times to select the “D-

2” screen.

Touch [MW]( rD).

• The “MW” screen appears.

Rotate [BANK]( tL) or [M-CH](L) to select the Mem-

ory channel to be programmed.

• “---.---.-- ------” appears when no content has been pro-

grammed into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)

Touch [MW]( yD) for 1 second to program the con-

tents into the Memory channel.

Check the programmed contents on the Memory u

mode. (p. ??-??)

For your reference ✓

The Memory channel contents, programmed in the DR

mode, can also be copied to the VFO. (p. ??-??)

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the part of

the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Set the

desired

contents.

Blinks

Touch

[MW]

Touch

[MW] for

1 second

[Example]:

Programming

“HIRANO43”

in “FROM”/

“HAMACH43”

in “TO” into

Memory

channel A-01.

[BANK]/

[M-CH]

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-7

Previous view

Programming a Memory channel (Continued)

Checking the programmed Memory con- D

tents

The programmed Memory channels can be checked on

the “MEMORY LIST” screen.

When the “M-3” (Menu 3) screen is selected, touch q

[MEMO](D) to display the “MEMO” (Memory)

screen.

Rotate [BANK]( wL) to select the Memory bank (A to

E) to be checked.

Touch [LIST]( eD) to display the “MEMORY LIST”

screen.

• Touch [∫] or [√](D) to select the displayed page.

• The Program Scan Edge Memory channels can be

checked on any band screen. “MEMORY LIST”

screen of

Bank A.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Access repeater

call sign

Destination call

sign

Checking the Memory contents pro- D

grammed in the DR mode

Push q

one or more times to cancel the DR

mode.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once w

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

• The access repeater call sign and the destination call

sign appear.

When the “M-2” (Menu 2) screen is selected, touch

[CS](D) to display the call sign programmed in the

selected channel.

For your reference ✓

“FROM” and “TO” names are automatically programmed

as the Memory name.

• The Memory name is not overwritten when the memo-

ry contents are programmed into the preprogrammed

channel.

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-8

Previous view

Any no longer used regular Memory channels can be

cleared, and then become blank channels.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [BANK]( wL) or [M-CH](L) to select the Mem-

ory channel to be cleared.

Push eMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

3” screen (Menu 3).

Touch [MEMO]( rD).

Touch [M-CL]( tD) for 1 second to clear the contents.

• The programmed contents disappear.

• “BLANK” appears.

Touch [M-CL]

for 1 second.

Touch

[MEMO].

Clearing a Memory channel

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-9

Previous view

The Memory channel contents (frequency, operating

mode, and so on.) can be copied to the VFO.

Copying in the Memory mode D

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [BANK]( wL) or [M-CH](L) to select the Mem-

ory channel to be copied.

• “BLANK” appears if the selected Memory channel is a

blank channel. In this case nothing can be copied.

Touch [V/M]( eD) for 1 second to copy the Memory

channel contents into the VFO.

Touch the Memory channel number indication to se- r

lect the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

Copying in the VFO mode D

In the VFO mode, select the Memory channel num- ➥

ber to be copied. And then, touch [V/M] for 1 second

to copy the Memory channel contents into the se-

lected VFO.

• “BLANK” appears if the selected Memory channel is a

blank channel. In this case nothing can be copied.

Touch [V/M]

for 1 second.

Touch [V/M].

The Memory

channel contents

are transferred into

the selected VFO.

( The display does

not change.)

Copying Memory contents

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-10

Previous view

All Memory channels, including Scan Edges and Call

channels, can be tagged with alphanumeric names of

up to 16 characters each.

[EXAMPLE]: Programming a memory name into Mem-

ory channel 99 of Bank A.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [BANK] to select Bank A. w

Rotate [M-CH] to select the Memory channel 99. e

Push rMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

3” screen (Menu 3).

Touch [MEMO]( tD) to display the “MEMO” screen

(Memory Menu).

Touch [LIST]( yD) to display the “MEMORY LIST”

screen.

Push uQUICK (D), and then touch [Edit Name] to en-

ter the “MEMORY NAME” screen (Memory name

edit screen).

• A cursor appears and blinks.

• If the channel you selected is a blank channel, [Edit

Name] does not appear.

Touch the desired block one or more times to iselect

the desired character or symbol.

Selectable characters and symbols

A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^

+ – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @ (space)

• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input

and Number input mode.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selec-

tion window.

• Touch “” to input a space.

Memory name edit screen

Input mode screen

Input a space

Move the cursor

Delete a character

Select an

input mode

Enter

Cancel edit

Touch [!"#] to

open the Symbol

character selec-

tion window.

Touch [MEMO]

on the “M-3”

screen.

Touch [LIST]

Touch

[Edit Name].

“MEMORY LIST”

screen of

Bank A.

Push QUICK

Programming a Memory name

Continued on the next page. ☞

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-11

Previous view

Touch [ o](D) to move the cursor backwards, or

touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.

!0 Repeat steps i and o to program up to 16 char-

acters memory name, and then touch [ENT](D) to

save the name, and return to the “MEMORY LIST”

screen.

!1 Touch [](D) to return to the “MEMO” (Memory)

screen.

• Push

After program-

ming, touch [ENT]

Touch [] to return

to the “MEMO”

screen.

Memory name programming (Continued)

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-12

Previous view

While in the memory mode, the programmed memory

name can be displayed.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Push wQUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.

Touch [Name Display]. e

Touch the desired Display type option. r

• OFF: Displays only the frequency.

• ON: Displays the memory name under the fre-

quency. (Default)

Push

QUICK .

Touch

[Name Display].

Touch “ON.”

The memory name

disappears.

Selecting a Memory display type

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-13

Previous view

The transceiver has a Memo pad function to store the

displayed content for easy writing and recalling. The

Memo pads are separate from the Memory channels.

The default number of Memo pads is 5. However, you

can increase the number to 10 in the “Memopad Num-

bers” item of the Set mode, if desired. (p. ??-??)

Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-

rize the displayed content temporarily, such as when

you ﬁ nd a DX station in a pile-up, or when a desired

station is busy for a long time and you want to tempo-

rarily search for other stations.

Use the transceiver’s Memo pads instead of relying on

hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.

Writing the displayed contents into the Memo pads D

You can store the displayed content by pushing MPAD

(R).

When you store content of the 6th Memo pad, the old-

est stored content is automatically erased, to make

room for the new content.

NOTE: Each Memo pad must have its own unique

content; Memo pads having identical content cannot

be written.

Memo pad function

Memo pads

Erased

Newest

Oldest

MPAD

In this example, 21.347.24 MHz (USB) will be

erased when 21.280.00 MHz (USB) is written.

Operating frequency of the VFO

or Memory mode

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

11 MEMORY OPERATION

11-14

Previous view

Memo pad function (Continued)

You can call up a Memo pad by pushing MPAD (R)

one or more times while in either the VFO or Memory

mode.

• The Memo pad content is called up, starting from the most

recently written.

When you call up a Memo pad, the previously displayed

content is automatically stored in a temporary pad. The

temporary pad can be recalled by pushing MPAD (R)

one or more times.

• You may think there are 6 Memo pads because 6 different

frequencies (5 are in Memo pads and 1 is in the temporary

pad) are called up by MPAD (R).

If you change the contents called up from a Memo

pad, the stored temporary pad content is replaced

with the changed content.

Calling up the DMemo pads

Operating frequency of the VFO

or Memory mode Memo pads

Newest

Oldest

MPAD

12-1

Section 12 SCAN OPERATION

Previous view

12-112-1

Scan types ..............................................................................12-2

Preparation .............................................................................12-3

Scan Set mode .......................................................................12-4

Voice Squelch Control function ...........................................12-6

Scan edge programming ......................................................12-7

Programmed scan (VFO mode) ............................................12-8

Fine programmed scan (VFO mode) ....................................12-9

Memory scan (Memory mode) ..............................................12-10

Memory scan

D .........................................................................12-10

Mode Select scan

D ..................................................................12-11

Select Memory scan

D ..............................................................12-12

Setting/Cancelling Select Memory channels

D .........................12-13

∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO mode/Memory mode) .....12-14

About the

D∂F scan ................................................................12-14

About the Fine

D∂F scan ........................................................12-15

VFO frequency and a priority channel .................................12-16

DR mode and a priority channel ..........................................12-17

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-2

Previous view

Scan

–

∂F frequency +∂F frequency

Center frequency

(Start frequency)

Jump

Mch 1 Mch 5

Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4

Mch 6Mch 7Mch 99

★

★★

★ means the Select Memory channels.

★

Mch 1

★

Mch 5

Mch 2

★

Mch 3 Mch 4

Mch 6

★

Mch 7

★

Mch 99

FM FM

USB FM CW

USBFM

Scan

Jump

Scan edges

Scanning automatically searches for signals and makes

it easier to locate new stations for contact or listening

purposes. The IC-7100 has several scan types; Pro-

grammed scan, Memory scan, Select Memory scan,

Mode Select scan and ∂F (Delta Frequency) scan.

Rotating the Dial changes the scanning direction as the

default. The Dial functions during a scan can be set in

the Scan Set mode. (p. ??-??)

MEMORY SCAN (p. ??-??)

Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory chan-

nels.

This scan operates in the Memory mode.

PROGRAMMED SCAN (p. ??-??)

Repeatedly scans between scan edges. P1 scans

between 1A and 1B, P2 scans between 2A and 2B,

and P3 scans between 3A and 3B frequencies.

This scan operates in the VFO mode.

SELECT MEMORY SCAN (p. ??-??)

Repeatedly scans all Select Memory channels.

This scan operates in the Memory mode.

MODE SELECT SCAN (p. ??-??)

Repeatedly scans all selected Memory mode chan-

nels.

This scan operates in the Memory mode.

∂F SCAN (p. ??-??)

Repeatedly scans within the ∂F span area.

This scan operates in both VFO and Memory

modes.

Scan types

PRIORITY SCAN (p. ??-??)

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 sec-

onds:

• While receiving on a VFO frequency

• During a VFO mode scan for the VFO mode

• While receiving on a repeater in the DR mode

• During a DR mode scan for the DR mode

This scan operates in the VFO or DR mode.

A VFO frequency, Memo-

ry channel, Call channel

or Program Scan Edge

channel can be selected

as the priority channel.

Checks every

5 seconds.

Receiving/Scan

(5 seconds)

VFO

mode Priority

channel

Receiving/Scan

(5 seconds)

mode Priority

channel

Checks eve

5 seconds

A Memory channel, Call

channel or Program Scan

Edge channel can be

selected as the priority

channel.

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-3

Previous view

For a Programmed scan:

Program scan edge frequencies into Program Scan

Edge channels “1A–3A” and “1B–3B.” (p. ??-??)

For a Memory scan:

Program two or more Memory channels. (Program

Scan Edge channels will not be scanned.) (p. ??-??)

For a Mode Select scan:

Program two or more Memory channels, all with the

same operating mode. (p. ??-??)

For a Select Memory scan:

Program two or more Memory channels as Select

Memory channels. (p. ??-??)

For a ∂F scan:

Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the “SCAN” screen.

(p. ??-??)

• Scan Resume function

You can set the scan to resume or cancel when detect-

ing a signal in the Scan Set mode. The Scan Resume

function must be set before starting a scan. (p. ??-??)

• Scan speed

The scan speed can be set to fast or slow in the Scan

Set mode. (p. ??-??)

• Dial function

How the Dial functions during a scan, can be set in the

Scan Set mode. (p. ??-??)

• Squelch status

❍ The scan starts with the squelch open

For a programmed scan:

When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less:

The scan continues until it is manually stopped— it

does not pause*, even if signals are detected.

* The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and then

opened. The scan resumes, or is cancelled, depending on

the Scan Resume setting.

When the tuning step is 5 kHz or more:

If Scan Resume is ON, the scan pauses on each step

when a signal is detected, then resumes.

If the Scan Resume is OFF, the scan does not start.

For memory scan:

If Scan Resume is ON, the scan pauses on each channel

when a signal is detected, then resumes.

If Scan Resume is OFF, the scan does not start.

❍ The scan starts with the squelch closed

The scan pauses when a signal is detected. The scan

resumes, or is cancelled, depending on the Scan Re-

sume setting.

Preparation

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-4

Previous view

Scan Set mode

The Scan speed, Scan Resume function, Pause Timer,

Resume Timer and the Dial function can be set in the

Scan Set mode.

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

1” (Menu 1) screen.

Touch [SCAN]( wD) to display the “SCAN” screen.

Touch [SET]( eD) to display the “SCAN SET” screen.

Touch the desired item. r

• To go back the previous tree level, touch [](D), or

MENU (C).

Touch a desired option shown on the display. t

• When you touch an option, it is automatically saved and

goes back the previous tree level.

• Push QUICK (C), and then touch “Default” to reset to the

default setting, if desired.

Push yMENU (C) to return to the “SCAN” screen.

Touch [SCAN]

Touch

[SET]

Touch a desired

item.

( Example:

SCAN Resume)

Touch a desired

option.

(Example: OFF)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-5

Previous view

SCAN Speed (Default: Fast)

Select the desired scan speed between slow and fast.

• Slow: The scan is slower.

• Fast: The scan is faster.

SCAN Resume (Default: ON)

Set the Scan Resume function ON or OFF.

• OFF: When a signal is detected, the scan is can-

celled.

• ON: When a signal is received during a scan, the

scan pauses for the set period of time in the

“Pause Timer” setting, and then resumes.

When the signal disappears, the scan resumes

after the set period of time in the “Resume Tim-

er” setting.

Pause Timer (Default: 10 sec)

Select the scan Pause Timer.

When a signal is received, the scan pauses according

to this setting.

When the “Resume Timer” is set to “0 sec,” this setting

is invalid.

• 2 to 20 sec: When a signal disappears while pausing

the scan for 2 to 20 seconds (in 2 sec-

onds steps), the scan resumes accord-

ing to the setting in the Resume Timer.

• Hold: When receiving a signal, the scan paus-

es and resumes when it disappears, ac-

cording to the setting in Resume Timer.

Resume Timer (Default: ON)

Select the scan Resume Timer.

When a received signal disappears, the scan resumes

according to this setting.

• 0 sec: The scan resumes immediately after the

signal disappears.

• 1 to 5 sec: The scan resumes 1 to 5 seconds after

the signal disappears.

• Hold: The scan remains paused according to

the Pause Timer, even if the signal disap-

pears.

- Rotate the Dial to resume the scan.

- When “Pause Timer” is set to 2 to 20

seconds, the scan resumes, according

to the “Pause Timer” setting.

MAIN DIAL (SCAN) (Default: Up/Down)

Select the function of the Dial while scanning.

• OFF : Rotating the Dial cancels the scan.

• Up/Down : Rotating the Dial changes the scanning

direction.

Scan Set mode (Continued)

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-6

Previous view

Voice Squelch Control function

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM

)

This function is useful when you do not want unmodu-

lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the

Voice Squelch Control (VSC) function is ON, the receiv-

er checks received signals for voice components.

The scan pauses, or is cancelled, if a received signal

includes voice components, and the tone of the voice

components changes within 1 second. See “Squelch

status” as described on page ??-??.

The scan resumes if the received signal includes no

voice components, or the tone of the voice components

does not change within 1 second.

Select SSB, AM or FM as the operating mode. q

Push wQUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.

Touch [VSC]. e

Touch the desired option. r

• “ ” appears when the VSC function is ON.

• When you touch an option, it is automatically saved and

goes back the previous tree level.

• The VSC function is usable in the phone modes

(SSB, AM and FM).

• The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu-

lated signals, regardless of whether the Scan Re-

sume function is set to ON or OFF.

QUICK

Touch [VSC].

Touch a desired

option.

(Example: ON)

Appears

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

NOTE: While listening to the radio with the VSC

function ON, the audio may be interrupted. The mu-

sic or a commercial, including narration or BGM, is

not detected as an audio component. In this case,

turn OFF the VSC function.

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-7

Previous view

Memory channels 1A–3A and 1B–3B are the Program

Scan Edge channels. They are used to program the up-

per and lower frequency edges for programmed scans.

(p. ??-??)

Factory default frequency and operating modes are

programmed into the Scan Edge channels: 1A/1B are

for HF, 2A/2B are for the 144 MHz, and 3A/3B are for

the 430 MHz frequency bands, and you can reprogram

it as desired.

If both upper and lower band edges are programmed

with the same frequency, a programmed scan can-

not start.

EXAMPLE: Programming 14.000.00 MHz into 2A and

14.360.00 MHz into 2B.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [M-CH] w(L) to select scan edge 2A.

Set 14.000.00 MHz as the lower frequency. e

Push rMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

1” (Menu 1) screen.

Touch [MW]( tD) for 1 second to program 14.000.00

MHz into scan edge 2A.

• Three beeps sound when the programming is complete.

Rotate [M-CH] y(L) to select scan edge 2B.

Set 14.360.00 MHz as the upper frequency. u

Touch [MW] for 1 second to program 14.360.00 MHz i

into scan edge 2B.

• Three beeps sound when the programming is complete.

If 2A/2B is selected as the scanning range when a o

programmed scan is started, it will search for signals

between 14.000.00 MHz and 14.360.00 MHz. (p. ??-

??)

[M-CH]

Touch [MW]

for 1 second

Programming 14.000.00 MHz/USB into 2A.

Programming 14.360.00 MHz/USB into 2B.

Scan edge programming

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-8

Previous view

A programmed scan searches for signals between Pro-

gram Scan Edge channels “1A–3A” and “1B–3B.”

Before starting the programmed scan, scan edges must

be programmed into these channels.

See the previous page for scan edge programming.

If the same frequencies are programmed into the

Program Scan Edge channels, the programmed

scan will not start.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

Touch the mode icon to display the Mode selection w

screen, and then touch the desired operating mode.

• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-

ning.

Touch the frequency ‘kHz’ area on the display for 1 e

second to display the Tuning step selection screen,

and then touch the desired tuning step. (p. ??-??)

• The tuning step can also be changed while scanning.

Push rMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

1” (Menu 1) screen.

Touch

[SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.

Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. y

• The scan performance differs, depending on the squelch

setting when the scan was started. See page ??-?? for

details.

• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set to “AUTO,” the

squelch is always open in the SSB, CW and RTTY

modes. (pp. ??-??, ??-??)

Touch [PROG]( uD) for 1 second, and then touch the

desired scan range between “P1,” “P2” and “P3.”

• The scan searches between programmed scan channels

1A–1B (P1), 2A–2B (P2) or 3A–3B (P3).

• Example: P2: 14.000.00–14.360.00

Touch [PROG]( iD) to start the programmed scan.

• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and the selected scan

range display blink while scanning.

• If

“Up/Down” is selected as

the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” op-

tion

in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the

scanning direction. (p. ??-??)

When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, o

pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Resume

function, the VSC function or the squelch status.

!0 Push [PROG](D) to cancel the scan.

While Programmed scanning

Touch

[SCAN]

Touch [PROG]

for 1 second.

Touch the de-

sired scan

range (Exam-

ple: P2)

Programmed scan (VFO mode)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-9

Previous view

Fine programmed scan (VFO mode)

When a signal is received during a Fine programmed

scan, the scanning tuning step is temporarily set to

10 Hz and the scan speed decreases.

Start the programmed scan. q

• Follow steps q through i as described on page ??-??.

While scanning, touch [FINE]( wD) to switch the scan

function between a programmed scan and a Fine

programmed scan.

Touch [PROG]( eD) to cancel the scan.

While Fine programmed scanning

While Programmed scanning

Touch [FINE].

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-10

Previous view

Memory scan D

A Memory scan searches for signals through Memory

channels 1 to 99.

Blank (unprogrammed) Memory channels are skipped.

NOTE: For a Memory scan to start, two or more

Memory channels must be programmed. (p. ??-??)

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Push wMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

1” (Menu 1) screen.

Touch

[SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.

Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. r

• The scan performance differs, depending on the squelch

setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for de-

tails.

• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set to “AUTO,” the

squelch is always open in the SSB, CW and RTTY

modes. (pp. ??-??, ??-??)

Touch [MEMO]( tD) to start the Memory scan.

• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and “MEMO SCAN”

blink while scanning.

• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” op-

tion in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the

scanning direction. (p. ??)

Touch [MEMO]( yD) to cancel the scan.

While Memory scanning

Touch

[SCAN]

Touch [MEMO]

Memory scan (Memory mode)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-11

Previous view

Mode Select scan D

Repeatedly scans all Memory channels with the same

operating mode as the displayed mode.

NOTE: For a Mode Select scan to start, two or more

Memory channels must be programmed, and their

operating mode must be the same as the displayed

mode.

Follow steps qq through e as described above to

display the “SCAN” screen.

Touch [MEMO]( wD) for 1 second, and then touch

“MODE-SEL” to start the Mode Select scan.

• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and “MODE-SEL

SCAN” blink while scanning.

• If

“Up/Down” is selected as

the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” op-

tion

in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the

scanning direction. (p. ??-??)

To change the operating mode while scanning, touch e

the mode icon to display the Mode selection screen,

and then touch the desired operating mode.

Push [MEMO]( rD) to cancel the scan.

While Mode Select scanning

Touch [MEMO]

for 1 second

Touch

“MODE-SEL.”

Touch the mode

icon, and then

touch the de-

sired operating

mode

Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-12

Previous view

Select Memory scan D

The Select Memory scan searches for signals through

Memory channels speciﬁ ed as “” (Select).

NOTE: For a Select Memory scan to start, two or

more Memory channels must be designated as Se-

lect Memory channels. (See below)

Follow steps qq through e as described on the page

??-?? to display the “SCAN” screen.

Touch [MEMO]( wD) for 1 second, and then touch

“SEL-MEMO” to start the Select Memory scan.

• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and “SEL–MEMO

SCAN” blink while scanning.

• If

“Up/Down” is selected as

the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” op-

tion

in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the

scanning direction. (p. ??-??)

Push [MEMO]( eD) to cancel the scan.

While Select Memory scanning

Touch [MEMO]

for 1 second.

Touch

“SEL-MEMO.”

Appears

Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-13

Previous view

Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)

All Memory channels can be set as Select Memory chan-

nels, except for the Scan Edge and Call channels.

When the “SCAN” screen or the “MEMO” screen ➥

(Memory Menu) is displayed, touch [SEL] to set or

cancel the displayed Memory channel as a Select

Memory channel.

• “” appears when the channel is set as a Select Memory

channel.

• An error beep sounds when the displayed Memory chan-

nel is a blank channel.

• Touching [SEL] for 1 second displays “SELECT ALL

Clear?.” Touch [YES](F-4) to clear all Select Memory

channel settings.

Setting/Cancelling Select Memory channels D

“SCAN” screen

When the channel is set as a Select

Memory channel.

“SELECT ALL Clear?” screen

After touching [SEL] for 1 second

to clear all Select Memory channel

settings.

Appears

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-14

Previous view

About the D∂F scan

∂F (Delta Frequency) scan searches for signals within

the speciﬁ ed range with the displayed VFO frequency

or Memory channel frequency as the center frequency.

The frequency range is speciﬁ ed by the width of the

selected span.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the VFO mode or Memory mode.

(p. ??-??)

Push wMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

1” (Menu 1) screen.

Touch

[SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.

Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. r

• The scan performance differs, depending on the squelch

setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for de-

tails.

• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set to “AUTO,” the

squelch is always open in the SSB, CW and RTTY

modes. (pp. ??-??, ??-??)

Touch [SPAN]( tD) one or more times to select the

desired ∂F span width.

• ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz, ±500 kHz

and ±1 MHz are selectable.

Set the center frequency of the y∂F scan.

• In the VFO mode, rotate the Dial to set the center fre-

quency.

• In the memory mode, rotate [M-CH] (L) to select the

desired Memory channel whose frequency will be the

center frequency.

Touch [ u∂F](D) to start the ∂F scan.

• “∂F SCAN,” the MHz and kHz decimal points blink while

scanning.

• If

“Up/Down” is selected as

the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” op-

tion

in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the

scanning direction. (p. ??-??)

When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, i

pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Re-

sume function, VSC function or the squelch status.

Touch [ o∂F](D) again to cancel the ∂F scan.

While ∂F scanning (VFO mode)

Set the center frequency

Touch

[SCAN]

Touch [SPAN] one or

more times to select

the ∂F span width.

∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO mode/Memory mode)

Rotate the Dial

(VFO mode)

Rotate the [M-CH]

(Memory mode)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-15

Previous view

About the Fine D∂F scan

When a signal is received during a Fine ∂F scan, the

scanning tuning step is temporarily set to 10 Hz and the

scan speed decreases.

Start q∂F scan.

• Follow steps q through u as described on page ??-??.

While scanning, touch [FINE]( wD) to switch the scan

function between ∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan.

Touch [ e∂F](D) to cancel the scan.

While Fine ∂F scanning

While ∂F scanning

Touch [FINE]

∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO mode/Memory mode) (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-16

Previous view

The receive frequency and the operating mode setting

Set the priority channel (Example: A05)

QUICK

[BANK]/

[M-CH]

Select the VFO

mode

Select the

Memory mode

Touch

“PRIO Watch ON”

While Priority

scanning

VFO frequency and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,

while receiving on a VFO frequency.

Touch the Memory channel number indication once q

or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

Set the receive frequency and the operating mode. w

(p. ??-??)

Touch the Memory channel number indication to se- e

lect the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)

Rotate [BANK] or [M-CH] r(L) to set the priority

channel.

•

Memory channel, Call channel or Program Scan Edge chan-

nel can be selected as the priority channel.

Push tQUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.

Touch “PRIO Watch ON” to start the Priority scan. y

• The VFO mode is automatically selected, and PRIO ap-

pears.

• To cancel the Priority scan, touch “PRIO Watch OFF” in

the Quick Menu window.

When a signal is received on the priority channel

The Priority channel is automatically selected, and

PRIO blinks on the screen.

• The scan pause timer and resume settings are the same

as for a normal scan.

Priority scan au-

tomatically paus-

es.

NOTE:

When the VFO mode is selected, you can normally

operate the transceiver; the operating frequency set-

ting, the scanning operation and so on.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

To start the Programmed scan during the

Priority scan, touch [SCAN] in the “M-1”

(Menu 1) screen, and then touch [PROG].

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-17

Previous view

The receive frequency and the operating mode setting

[BANK]/

[M-CH]

When the VFO

frequency is set

as the priority

channel

Select the repeater to receive

(Example: Hirano43)

Select the DR

mode

Touch

“PRIO Watch ON”

Appears while

the priority

scanning

Set the

receive

frequency

in the VFO

mode.

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,

while receiving a repeater in the DR mode.

Set the priority channel1.

• Using the VFO frequency

q Touch the Memory channel number indication

once or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)

w Set the receive frequency and the operating

mode. (p. ??-??)

• Using the Memory/Call/Program Scan Edge

channel

q Touch the Memory channel number indication

once or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-

??)

w Rotate [BANK] or [M-CH] (L) to set the priority

channel.

•

Memory channel, Call channel or Program Scan Edge

channel can be selected as the priority channel.

Select the repeater in the DR mode2.

q Push

w Touch “FROM” (Access repeater), if “FROM” is

not selected.

e Rotate the Dial to select the desired repeater.

•

You can select a repeater in the “FROM SELECT” screen

that is displayed after touching the repeater name on

“FROM.”

Start the Priority scan3.

q Push QUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu win-

dow.

w Touch “PRIO Watch ON” to start the Priority

scan.

• The DR mode screen is automatically selected, and

PRIO appears.

• To cancel the Priority scan, touch “PRIO Watch OFF”

in the Quick Menu window.

DR mode and a priority channel

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

12 SCAN OPERATION

12-18

Previous view

DR mode and a priority channel (Continued)

NOTE:

When the DR mode screen is displayed, you can

normally use the DR mode; “FROM” (Access

repeater)/“TO” (Destination) selection, the DR mode

scanning and so on.

To start the DR

mode scan,

touch [SCAN]

in the “D-1”

screen.

When a signal is received on the priority channel

The Priority channel is automatically selected, and

PRIO blinks on the screen.

• The scan pause timer and resume settings are the same

as for a normal scan.

Priority scan au-

tomatically paus-

es.

13-1

Section 13 USING AN SD CARD

Previous view

About the SD card .................................................................13-2

Saving data onto the SD card ...............................................13-3

Inserting the SD card ............................................................13-4

Formatting the SD card

D .........................................................13-4

Removing the SD card ..........................................................13-5

Removing the SD card while the transceiver’s power is ON

D .13-5

Saving the setting data onto an SD card .............................13-6

Saving with a different ﬁ le name ..........................................13-7

Loading the saved data ﬁ les that are on the SD card ........13-8

Backing up the data stored on the SD card onto a PC ......13-10

About the SD card’s folder

Dcontents ......................................13-10

Making

D a backup ﬁ le on your PC ...........................................13-11

Updating the repeater list .....................................................13-12

Cloning Transceiver-to-Transceiver using an SD card .......13-15

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-2

Previous view

The SD and SDHC cards are not available from Icom.

Purchase locally.

An SD card of up to 2 GB or an SDHC of up to 32 GB,

can be used with the IC-7100.

Icom has checked the compatibility with the following

SD and SDHC cards.

(As of March 2013)

Brand Type Memory size

SanDisk®

SD 2 GB

SDHC

4 GB

8 GB

16 GB

32 GB

• The above list does not guarantee the card’s perfor-

mance.

• Through the rest of this document, the SD card and

an SDHC card are simply called SD cards.

• Icom recommends that you format all SD cards to be

used with the IC-7100, even preformatted SD cards

for PCs or other uses.

NOTE:

• Read the instructions of the SD card thoroughly be-

fore use.

• NEVER remove the SD card, detach the battery

pack/case, or power OFF the transceiver, while

reading or writing data to or from the SD card, or

during cloning. It will cause the data to be corrupted

or damage the card.

• NEVER drop, impact or apply vibration to the SD

card. This will cause the data to be corrupted or

damage the card.

• The SD card will get warm if used continuously for a

long period of time.

• An SD card has a certain lifetime, so data reading

or writing may not be possible when using it over a

long time period.

• When reading or writing data is impossible, the SD

card’s lifetime has ended. In this case, purchase a

new one. We recommend you make a backup ﬁ le of

the important data onto your PC.

• Icom will not be responsible for any damage caused

by data corruption of an SD card.

Saving the factory default data is recommended.

Insert the card into the transceiver’s slot, and then ➥

push

SET

Touch “SD Card,” then “Save Setting” to save.

About the SD card

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-3

Previous view

The following data can be stored onto the card:

• Data settings of the transceiver

Memory channel contents, and repeater lists stored in

the transceiver.

• Communication contents

The transmitted and received audio.

• Communication log

The communication and receive history log.

•

Automatic answering voice audio for the DV mode

Voice audio to use with the Auto Reply function in the

DV Mode.

• V

oice audio for the Voice TX function

Voice audio to use with the Voice TX function.

•

RTTY decode log

The transmitted or received RTTY decode history log.

Saving data onto the SD card

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-4

Previous view

Turn OFF the transceiver. q

Insert the card into the slot until it locks in place, and w

makes a ‘click’ sound.

• “ ” appears when the SD card is inserted.

• “” and “ ” alternately blink while accessing the SD

card.

NOTE: Before inserting, be sure to check the card

direction.

If the card is forcibly or inversely inserted, it will dam-

age the card and/or the slot.

Inserting the SD card

Terminals

facing down Cut corner side

Front

panel

SD card

Appears

●

Formatting the SD card D

• If you use a brand new SD card, format it, by doing

the following steps.

• Formatting a card erases all its data. Before for-

matting any programmed card, make a backup ﬁ le

onto your PC.

Turn OFF the transceiver, and then insert the card q

into the slot.

Turn ON the transceiver. w

• “ ” appears when the SD card is inserted.

Push e

SET

Touch the “SD Card” Set mode. r

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the “Format” item. t

• The conﬁ rmation screen “Format OK?” appears.

Touch [YES]( yD).

• The formatting starts and the display shows the format-

ting progress.

• After formatting ends, the display automatically returns to

the screen displayed before touching [YES](D).

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-5

Previous view

Turn OFF the power. q

Push in the SD card until a click sounds, and then w

carefully pull it out.

Removing the SD card

Removing the SD card while the trans- D

ceiver’s power is ON

Push q

SET

Touch the “SD Card” Set mode. w

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the “Unmount” item. e

• The conﬁ rmation screen “Unmount OK?” appears.

Touch [YES]( rD).

• When the unmounting is completed, “Unmount is com-

pleted.” is displayed, then the display automatically re-

turns to the screen displayed before touching [YES](D).

Push in the SD card until a click sounds, and then t

carefully pull it out.

Push

Pull out

●

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Front

panel

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-6

Previous view

Memory channels, Set mode item settings, and repeat-

er lists can be saved on the SD card.

Saving data settings on the SD card allows you to eas-

ily restore the transceiver to its previous settings, even

if an All reset is performed.

For your information ✓

Data settings are saved in the “icf” ﬁ le format that is

used in the CS-7100 cloning software.

The saved data on the SD card can be copied onto a

PC and edited by the cloning software.

Data settings can be saved as a new ﬁ le or to overwrite

an older ﬁ le.

Saved as a new ﬁ le

Push q

SET

Touch the “Save Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set w

mode.

(SD Card > Save Setting)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “<<New File>>.” e

• The “FILE NAME” screen appears.

• The ﬁ le name is automatically named in the following

manner; Setyyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd:

day, xx: serial number)

Example: If a second ﬁ le is saved on March 1, 2013, the

ﬁ le is named “Set20130301_02.”

• If you want to change the ﬁ le name, see “Save with a dif-

ferent ﬁ le name” (p. ??-??).

Touch [ENT]( rD) to save the ﬁ le name.

• The conﬁ rmation screen “Save ﬁ le?” appears.

Touch [YES]( tD) to save.

• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD

CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.

Push y

SET

Saving the setting data onto an SD card

●

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Overwriting a ﬁ le

(Example: Overwriting the “Set20121210_01”)

➥Select the desired ﬁ le to be overwritten in step e as

described on page ??-??.

(Example: Selecting “Set20121210_01”)

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-7

Previous view

Saving with a different ﬁ le name

Push q

SET

Touch the “Save Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set w

mode.

(SD Card > Save Setting)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “<<New File>>.” e

• The “FILE NAME” screen appears.

Touch [CLR]( rD) to delete the previously programmed

character.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

When the cursor does not select a character, the previ-

ous character is deleted.

If [CLR](D) is continuously touched, all the characters

are deleted.

Touch the desired block one or more times to tselect

the desired character or symbol.

Selectable characters and symbols

A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^

+ – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @ (space)

• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input

and Number input mode.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selec-

tion window.

• Touch “” to input a space.

Touch [ y](D) to move the cursor backwards, or

touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.

Repeat steps ut and y to program up to 14 charac-

ters name.

• Example: MY DATA

Touch [ENT]( iD) to save the name.

• The conﬁ rmation screen “Save ﬁ le?” appears.

Touch [YES]( yD) to save.

• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD

CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.

Push u

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch [!"#]

to open the

Symbol char-

acter selection

window.

After program-

ming, touch

[ENT]

In the

“Save Setting”

screen, touch

“<<New File>>”

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-8

Previous view

The saved memory channels, Set mode item settings

and repeater lists can be copied to the transceiver.

This function is convenient when copying the saved

data, such as memory channels, or repeater lists, to

another IC-7100 and then operating with the same

data.

Saving the current data is recommended before load-

ing other data in the transceiver.

(Example: Loading all the data in the

“Set20130301_01” ﬁ le)

Push q

SET

Touch the “Load Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set w

mode.

(SD Card > Load Setting)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired ﬁ le to be loaded. e

(Example: Selecting “Set20130301_01”)

• The LOAD FILE screen appears.

Touch the desired loading roption, as shown below.

• ALL:

Loads all memory channels, item settings in the menu

list and the repeater list into the transceiver.

• Select:

Loads all memory channels, Set mode item settings

and the repeater list into the transceiver.

“MY call signs” and “REF Adjust” settings can be se-

lected to be loaded.

• Repeater List Only:

Loads only the repeater list into the transceiver.

The “Keep 'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears. t

Touch [YES], [NO] or [Cancel](D).

• When [YES](D) is touched, the skip settings of the re-

peater list are retained. (p. ??-??)

• When [NO](D) is touched, the skip settings of the re-

peater list are not retained. (p. ??-??)

• When [Cancel](D) is touched, returns to the LOAD FILE

screen.

• When [YES] or [NO](D) is touched, “Load ﬁ le?” ap-

pears.

To update the repeater list, click

here!

Loading the saved data ﬁ les that are on the SD card

In the

“SD Card”

screen, touch

“Load Setting.”

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Continued on the next page ☞

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-9

Previous view

Touch [YES]( yD) to start the ﬁ le check.

• While checking the ﬁ le, “CHECKING FILE” and a prog-

ress bar are displayed.

After checking, settings data loading ubegins.

• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-

played.

After loading iends, “COMPLETED!” appears.

To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.

Loading the saved settings ﬁ le that are on the SD card (Continued)

Appears only when “ALL” or “Select”*

is selected in the LOAD FILE screen,

* If “Select” is selected, only when the

“REF Adjust” check box is checked.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-10

Previous view

A backup ﬁ le allows easy restoring even if the setting

data in the SD card is accidentally deleted.

Depending on your PC, a memory card reader (pur-

chase locally) may be additionally required to read the

SD card.

About the SD card’s folder Dcontents

The folder in the SD card contains the following:

IC-7100 folder q

The folders created in the IC-7100 are contained in

this IC-7100 folder.

Decode folder w

The RTTY decode folder is created.

RTTY e folder

The transmitted or received RTTY decode data is

stored in the “txt” format.

The ﬁ le format can be changed to “html” in the RTTY

DECODE LOG SET screen.

QSO r Log

QSO log data is stored in the “csv” format.

Reply folder t

Automatic reply data is stored in the “wav” format.

RxLog y

RX record log data is stored in the “csv” format.

Setting folder u

The transceiver’s setting data is stored in the “icf”

format.

Voice folder i

The recorded QSO audio date folders are created in

the Voice folder.

yyyymmdd folder o

Recorded audio ﬁ le is stored in the “wav” format.

The folder name is automatically created in the fol-

lowing format:

yyyymmdd (yyyy:Year, mm:month, dd:day)

!0 VoiceTx

Recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX function

is stored in the “wav” format.

Click

The setting

data

Click

(Example: Selecting the setting data)

When the SD card is inserted into the SD card drive of your

PC or the SD card reader (purchase locally), the screen ap-

pears as shown below.

IC-7100 q

Decode w

Reply t

Setting u

Voice iyyyymmdd o

yyyymmdd o

QsoLog r

RxLog y

!0 VoiceTx

Backing up the data stored on the SD card onto a PC

Rtty e

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-11

Previous view

Making a backup ﬁ le on your PC D

Windows 7 is used for these instructions.

Insert the SD card into the SD card drive on your q

PC.

• If no SD card drive is built-in, connect a memory card

reader (purchase locally) and then insert the SD card into

it.

Click the “Open folder to view ﬁ les” option to access w

the card.

Select “Removal disk” and right click. e

Click “Copy.” r

Open the desired folder to copy to, t then right click,

then click “Paste” to copy the data that is in the SD

card onto the hard disk.

(Example: Copying into the “Backup” folder in C

drive)

When removing the SD card from yyour PC, click the

SD card icon in the task bar. (“ ” icon in the screen

shot as shown to the right.)

• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is

connected.

Remove the SD card from uyour PC when “Safe To

Remove Hardware” appears.

• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is

connected.

Right click

Click

Backing up the data stored on the SD card onto a PC (Continued)

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-12

Previous view

For easy operation, the repeater list is preloaded into

your transceiver.

This section describes how to manually update the re-

peater list using an SD card.

The latest setting ﬁ le, which includes the repeater list,

can be downloaded from the Icom website.

Downloading the latest setting ﬁ le (ICF ﬁ le)1.

q Access the following URL to download the latest

data.

http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/ﬁ rm/

index.html

• The latest settings ﬁ le (ICF ﬁ le) and repeater list (CSV;

Comma Separated Values ﬁ le) are contained in the

downloaded ZIP ﬁ le.

File Name: 7100_U_130301.zip

Depending on the

updated ﬁ le date.

Depending on the version.

This instruction manual describes when the ﬁ le name

is “7100_U_130301.zip,” for example.

w Decompress the compressed ﬁ le that is downloaded

from the Icom website.

“7100_U_130301” folder will be created in the same

place where the downloaded file is saved.

Inserting the SD card into a PC2.

e Insert the SD card into the SD card drive on your

PC.

• Icom recommends that you format all SD cards to

be used with the IC-7100, even preformatted SD

cards for PCs or other uses.

See page ?-? for details of inserting and removing

the SD card.

Copying the latest ICF ﬁ le to the SD card3.

r Double-click the “7100_U_130301” folder created in

the same place where the downloaded file is saved.

t Copy the ICF ﬁ le (Example: “7100_USA_130301.

icf”) in the folder to the “Setting” folder in the “IC-

7100” folder of the SD card.

Continued on the next page ☞

Click

IC-7100 Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals

2013/3/MM

IC-7100’s latest setting ﬁ le is uploaded to

“Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals” in

the Icom website screen.

• The displayed contents may differ.

Updating the repeater list

SD card

Transceiver

to the Card

reader

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-13

Previous view

Inserting the SD card4.

y Remove the SD card from your PC, and insert the

card into the transceiver’s slot.

See page ??-?? for details of inserting the SD card

into the transceiver.

Saving the current data is recommended before

loading other data into the transceiver.

Updating the repeater list5.

u Push

SET

i Touch the “Load Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set

mode.

(SD Card > Load Setting)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

o Touch the ICF ﬁ le to be loaded.

(Example: Selecting “7100_USA_130301.icf”)

• The LOAD FILE screen appears.

!0 Touch “Repeater List Only.”

• The “Keep 'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.

• Loads only the repeater list into the transceiver.

Continued on the next page ☞

Updating the repeater list (Continued)

Select the ﬁ le

to be loaded

●

SD card

Transceiver

from the Card

reader

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-14

Previous view

!1 Touch [YES], [NO] or [Cancel](D).

• When [YES](D) is touched, the skip settings of the re-

peater list are retained. (p. ??-??)

• When [NO](D) is touched, the skip settings of the re-

peater list are not retained. (p. ??-??)

• When [Cancel](D) is touched, returns to the LOAD FILE

screen.

• When [YES] or [NO](D) is touched, “Load ﬁ le?” ap-

pears.

!2 Touch [YES](D) to start the ﬁ le check.

• While checking the ﬁ le, “CHECKING FILE” and a prog-

ress bar are displayed.

!3 After checking, settings data loading begins.

• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-

played.

!4 After loading ends, “COMPLETED!” appears.

To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.

Repeater list updating is complete!

Updating the repeater list (Continued)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

13 USING AN SD CARD

13-15

Previous view

Cloning Transceiver-to-Transceiver using an SD card

This topic describes the cloning method using the SD

card.

Memory channel contents, Set mode item settings and

repeater list can be saved onto a SD card.

Recorded voice memories are not included in the clon-

ing data. To play back the master transceiver’s voice

memory, insert the SD card into sub transceiver, or

make a copy onto the sub transceiver’s SD card using

a PC.

Description is with the SD card is already inserted.

Saving the master transceiver’s setting data onto 1.

the SD card.

q Save the master transceiver’s setting data onto the

SD card, as described on page ??.

Remove the SD card from the master transceiver, 2.

and then insert it to the sub transceiver.

w Turn OFF the master transceiver’s power.

e Remove the SD card from the master transceiver as

shown at right.

r Insert the removed SD card into the sub transceiver,

then turn ON the sub transceiver’s power.

Loads the setting data into the sub transceiver.3.

t The master transceiver’s setting data loads into the

sub transceiver, as described on page ??.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

SD card

Master transceiver Sub transceiver

Push

Pull out

Front

panel

When you load the data, be sure to set the loading

content as “Repeater List Only” or “Select” in the LOAD

FILE screen, and if “Select” is selected, the “REF Ad-

just” check box must be cleared.

Otherwise, it may result in a frequency deviation.

orLOAD FILE screen

Touch “Repeater List Only”

LOAD OPTIOIN screen

( Appears when “Select”

is touched in the LOAD

FILE screen)

Touch “Load” without check-

ing the “REF Adjust” box.

14-1

Section 14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

Previous view

Recording a QSO audio ........................................................14-2

To start recording

D ..................................................................14-2

To stop recording

D ...................................................................14-2

Changing the recording mode .............................................14-3

Playing back the recorded audio .........................................14-4

Operation while playing back ...............................................14-5

Fast forward while playing

D .....................................................14-5

Rewind while playing

D .............................................................14-5

Pause while playing

D ...............................................................14-5

Playing the previous ﬁ le

D.........................................................14-5

Playing the next ﬁ le

D ...............................................................14-5

Moving to the beginning of the previous ﬁ le

D ..........................14-5

Moving to the beginning of the next ﬁ le

D .................................14-5

VOICE PLAYER screen

D’s descriptions ..................................14-5

Changing the skip time .........................................................14-6

Deleting the recorded contents (audio) ...............................14-7

Deleting the folder .................................................................14-8

Continue to record even if no signals are received ...........14-9

Record the transmit and receive audio into the same ﬁ le .14-10

Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed ...............14-11

Viewing the folder information .............................................14-12

Viewing the ﬁ le information ..................................................14-13

Viewing the SD card’s free space and recordable time .....14-15

Playing back the voice memory data on a PC ....................14-16

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-2

Previous view

The Voice Memory function records a QSO (communi-

cation) audio onto the SD card.

This function enables you to record both received and

transmitted audio, a QSO with a DX’pedition, and play-

back the recorded audio after the QSO.

NOTE: Be sure to insert an SD card into the trans-

ceiver before recording a QSO audio.

To start recording D

Push q

QUICK

Touch the “<<REC Start>>” item to start voice re- w

cording.

• Touch [√](D) one or more times to select the desired

page.

• The transceiver displays “Recording started” and auto-

matically exits the Quick Menu screen.

• “” appears while the recording is paused.

• “” appears and “ ” and “ ” alternately blink while record-

ing.

• Recording is continuous until you manually stop record-

ing, or the card becomes full.

• If the recording ﬁ le’s content reaches 2GB, the transceiv-

er automatically creates a new ﬁ le, and continues record-

ing.

NOTE: Once recording has started, it will continue,

even if the transceiver is rebooted.

Recording a QSO audio

QUICK

While recording

While pausing

Touch

“<<REC Start>>”

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Convenient! ✓

When the PTT Automatic Recording function is set to

ON, the recording automatically starts when [PTT] is

pushed. (p. ??-??)

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >

PTT Auto REC)

To stop recording D

Push q

QUICK

Touch “<<REC Stop>>” to stop voice recording. w

• Touch [√](D) one or more times to select the desired

page.

• The transceiver displays “Recording stopped,” and auto-

matically exits the Quick Menu screen.

Touch

“<<REC Stop>>”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-3

Previous view

You can change the recording mode in the Set mode to

record only the received audio.

The default setting is “TX&RX” (Both transmit and

receive signals are recorded).

Push q

SET

Touch the “REC Mode” item of the “Voice Memo” Set w

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >

REC Mode)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “RX Only” to esave, and return to the previous

screen.

Push r

SET

Changing the recording mode

SET

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“Recorder Set.”

Touch

“REC Mode.”

Touch

“RX Only.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-4

Previous view

Push q

SET

Touch the “Play Files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set w

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically

made when the recording starts.)

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:

month, d: day.)

Touch the folder that contains the ﬁ le you want to e

play.

• The ﬁ le list is displayed.

• The ﬁ le name is formatted yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,

m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)

Touch the ﬁ le that you want to play. r

• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the ﬁ le

starts to playback.

Touch [ t](D) or push

back, and return to the ﬁ le list screen.

Playing back the recorded audio

SET

Touch the fold-

er that contains

the ﬁ le you want

to play.

Touch the ﬁ le

that you want

to play.

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

Touch

“Play Files.”

While playing back

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-5

Previous view

You can fast forward or rewind while playing back.

Fast forward while playing D

Touch to fast forward to the skip time point.

(Default: 10 seconds)

If you want to change the skip time, see “Changing the

skip time.” (p. ??-??)

Rewind while playing D

Touch to rewind to the skip time point.

(Default: 10 seconds)

If you want to change the skip time, see “Changing the

skip time.” (p. ??-??)

• If you touch within the ﬁ rst second of the ﬁ le, the skip

time at the end of the previously recorded ﬁ le will playback.

Pause while playing D

Touch to pause.

• While pausing, appears.

Touch to resume.

Playing the previous ﬁ le D

Touch to play the previous ﬁ le.

• In case there are other ﬁ les in the folder, while the oldest

ﬁ le is playing back, touch to start playing the beginning

of the ﬁ le.

Playing the next ﬁ le D

Touch to play the next ﬁ le.

• In case there are other ﬁ les in the folder, while the most re-

cent ﬁ le is playing back, touch to stop the playback.

Moving to the beginning of the previous D

ﬁ le

When the playback is paused anywhere within the ﬁ le,

touch one or more times to return to the beginning

of the ﬁ le, and pause.

• Touch to play it back.

When the playback is paused at beginning of a ﬁ le,

touch to move to the beginning of the previous ﬁ le,

and pause.

• Touch to play it back.

Moving to the beginning of the next ﬁ le D

When the playback is paused, touch to move to the

beginning of the next ﬁ le, and pause.

• Touch to play it back.

Operation while playing back

VOICE PLAYER screen D’s descriptions

The VOICE PLAYER screen is shown below.

Recording information

Shows the recorded fre-

quency, mode and audio

category.

• When the receive audio is

playing back, the audio cat-

egory is displayed as “RX.”

When the transmit audio is

playing back, the audio cat-

egory is displayed as “TX.”

Repeater call sign/name

Shows the repeater call

sign used in the DV mode.

When the repeater name

is programmed in your

repeater list, the name is

also displayed.

Pause or play

Rewind Fast forward

Play the next ﬁ lePlay the previous ﬁ le

File name

Shows the playback

ﬁ le name.

File numbers

Shows the current playback

ﬁ le and the total number of

ﬁ les in the folder.

Progress bar

Shows the play

back progress bar.

Total time

Shows the ﬁ le’s total

playback time.

Playback mark

Appears while the audio

is playing back.

• The mark disappears

while fast forwarding, re-

winding or pausing.

Played back time

Shows the played

back time.

Convenient! ✓

You can fast forward or rewind the ﬁ le that is playing by

rotating the Dial.

The fast forward/rewind time is one twentieth of the to-

tal ﬁ le time, regardless of the skip time setting.

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-6

Previous view

You can change the fast forward and rewind skip time

while playing.

Push q

SET

Touch the “Skip Time” item of the “Voice Memo” Set w

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Player Set >

Skip Time)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired skip time of 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds e

to save, and return to the previous screen.

Push r

SET

Changing the skip time

SET

Touch

“Player Set.”

Touch

“Skip Time.”

(Example)

Touch “5sec.”

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-7

Previous view

Push q

SET

Touch the “Play files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set w

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play files)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically

made when recording starts.)

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:

month, d: day.)

Touch the folder including the ﬁ le that you want to e

delete.

• The ﬁ le list is displayed.

• The ﬁ le name is formatted yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,

m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)

Touch the ﬁ le that you want to delete for 1 second. r

Touch “Delete.” t

• The conﬁ rmation screen “Delete ﬁ le?” appears.

Touch “YES.” y

• The selected ﬁ le is deleted.

Push u

SET

When you want to erase all audio ﬁ les in the folder at

one time, select “Delete All” in step t above.

Deleting the recorded contents (audio)

SET

Touch “Delete.”

Touch “YES.”

Touch the ﬁ le that

you want to delete

for 1 second

Touch

“Play ﬁ les.”

Touch the folder

including the ﬁ le

that you want to

delete.

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the part of

the controller.

L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-8

Previous view

NOTE: All the ﬁ les in the folder are also deleted.

Push q

SET

Touch the “Play files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set w

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play files)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically

made when recording starts.)

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:

month, d: day.)

Touch the folder that you want to delete for 1 sec- e

ond.

Touch “Delete.” r

• The conﬁ rmation screen “Delete folder?” appears.

Touch “YES.” t

• The selected folder is deleted.

Push y

SET

When you want to erase all folders at one time, select

“Delete All Folders” in step r.

Deleting the folder

Touch “Delete.”

Touch “YES.”

Touch

“Play ﬁ les.”

Touch the folder

that you want to

delete for 1 second

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

SET

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-9

Previous view

In the default settings, the transceiver records audio

only while receiving signals (the squelch is open).

If you want to continue recording even if no signal is

received, do the following steps.

Push q

SET

Touch the “RX REC Condition” item of the “Voice w

Memo” Set mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >

RX REC Condition)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “Always” to continuously record even if no sig- e

nal is received.

• Always: Recording continues, even if no signals

are received.

• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records audio only while

receiving signals (the squelch opens).

Push r

SET

Continue to record even if no signals are received

SET

Touch

“RX REC Condition.”

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

(Example)

Touch “Always.”

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch

“Recorder Set.”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-10

Previous view

The transceiver can record the transmit and receive au-

dio into the same ﬁ le.

Push q

SET

Touch the “File Split” item of the “Voice Memo” Set w

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >

File Split)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “OFF.” e

• OFF : The transceiver records the transmit and receive

audio into the same ﬁ le.

• ON : The transceiver records the transmit and receive

audio into each ﬁ le.

The transceiver makes separate new ﬁ les for

transmit and receive audio. (Default setting)

• When you set the RX REC Condition item to

“Squelch Auto,” the transceiver records audio to

the new ﬁ le when the squelch either opens or

closes.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder set >

RX REC Condition)

Push r

SET

NOTE: Even if you set the “File Split” item to OFF,

when the recording ﬁ le’s content becomes 2 GB, the

transceiver continues to record, but to a new ﬁ le.

About the VOICE PLAYER screen when recording

into the same ﬁ le

The VOICE PLAYER screen shows information that

is recorded ﬁ rst.

When the receive audio was recorded ﬁ rst, the trans-

mit audio information is not displayed on the screen.

Record the transmit and receive audio into the same ﬁ le

SET

Touch

“File Split.”

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

Touch

“OFF.”

Touch

“Recorder Set.”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-11

Previous view

The transceiver starts to record the transmitted audio

when the [PTT] switch is pushed.

After transmitting, when the transceiver receives a sig-

nal in a given amount of time, it also records the re-

ceived audio. Therefore, you can record all communica-

tion audio using this function.

Push q

SET

Touch the “PTT Auto REC” item of the “Voice Memo” w

Set mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >

PTT Auto REC)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “ON.” e

• OFF : The transceiver does not start to record when the

[PTT] switch is pushed.

• ON : The transceiver starts to record when the [PTT]

switch is pushed.

Push r

SET

NOTE: When you set PTT AUTO REC to ON, see

the notes below.

• The transceiver also starts to record audio when

the optional microphone’s [PTT] switch is pushed,

transmitting using the VOX function or the CI-V re-

mote controller.

• All transmit audio is recorded.

( When “RX Only” is set in the “REC Mode” item,

transmit audio is not recorded)

• When the transceiver receives a signal less than

10 seconds after transmitting, the transceiver also

records the receive audio.

• In addition, when the transceiver receives a signal,

and then receives other signals less than 10 sec-

onds later, it records all signals audio.

Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed

SET

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch

“ON.”

Touch

“PTT Auto REC.”

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

Touch

“Recorder Set.”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-12

Previous view

The transceiver can display the folder’s name, number

of the ﬁ les in the folder, total capacity of the ﬁ les and

date.

Push q

SET

Touch the “ w

Play Files

” item of the “Voice Memo” Set

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically

made when recording starts.)

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:

month, d: day.)

Touch the folder that contains the ﬁ le you want to e

view for 1 second.

Touch the “Folder Information” item. r

• The information screen appears.

Touch [ t](C) to cancel the information screen.

• Touching

SET

QUICK

Push y

SET

Viewing the folder information

SET

Shows the information.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch

“Play Files.”

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

Touch the folder that

you want to view the

information

Touch

“Folder Information.”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-13

Previous view

The transceiver can display the recorded ﬁ le’s frequen-

cy, mode, date, and so on.

Push q

SET

Touch the “ w

Play Files

” item of the “Voice Memo” Set

mode.

( Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically

made when recording starts.)

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:

month, d: day.)

Touch the folder that contains the ﬁ le you want to e

view.

• The ﬁ le list is displayed.

• The ﬁ le name is formatted yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,

m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)

Touch the ﬁ le that you want to view the information r

for 1 second.

Touch the “File Information” item. t

• The information screen appears.

Touch [ y](C) to cancel the information screen.

• Touching

SET

QUICK

Push u

SET

Viewing the ﬁ le information

SET

Touch

“Play Files.”

Touch

“Voice Memo.”

Touch

“QSO Recorder.”

Touch the folder that

contains the ﬁ le you

want to view.

Touch the file that

you want to view

the information for 1

second.

Touch

“File Information.”

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Continued on the next page. ☞

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-14

Previous view

Viewing the ﬁ le information (Continued)

• Receive Information screen ( Receiving in the

DR mode)

Example of ﬁ le information screens (The display items differ, depending on the recording contents.)

• Transmit Information screen

(Your own position)

( Transmitting in the

DR mode)

(Your own position) (Destination position)

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-15

Previous view

Push q

SET

Touch the “SD Card” item. w

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the “SD Card Info” item. e

• The information screen appears.

Touch [ r](C) to cancel the information screen.

• Touching

SET

QUICK

Push t

SET

Viewing the SD card’s free space and recordable time

SET

Shows the information screen.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Touch

“SD Card.”

Touch

“SD Card Info.”

14 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

14-16

Previous view

You can also playback the voice memory data on a

PC.

However, the recorded information (frequency, date,

and so on) are not displayed.

• Mircosoft® Windows® 7 is used for the description.

Example: Connect a memory card reader (3rd party

product) to the PC, and insert the SD card

into the reader. Then playing back the voice

memory data in the card.

• When you copy the voice memory data from the

SD card to the PC’s hard disk drive, you also

operate the same as following steps for playing

back data.

Connect the memory card reader to the PC, and q

then insert the SD card into the reader.

• If your PC has an SD card drive, insert the card into the

drive.

When the SD card is inserted in the SD card drive of w

the PC or the SD card reader, the screen appears,

as shown to the right.

• The [IC-7100] folder appears.

Double-click the [IC-7100] folder. e

Double-click

NOTE:

• The operations while playing back may differ, de-

pending on the software. Therefore, refer to the

software’s instruction manual for details.

• When the ﬁ le does not playback, even if you dou-

ble-click the ﬁ le, download appropriate software

like Windows Media® Player.

Double-click the [Voice] folder. r

Double-click the folder in which the ﬁ le you want to t

playback is stored.

(Example: 20130301 folder)

To playback the ﬁ le, double-click it. y

(Example: 20130301_184451.wav)

Click

Double-click

Playing back the voice memory data on a PC

SD card

Transceiver

To the Card

reader

15-1

Section 15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

Previous view

Recording the voice audio ....................................................15-2

Playing back the recorded voice audio ...............................15-3

Programming a memory name .............................................15-4

Transmitting the recorded voice audio ................................15-6

Adjusting the TX volume level

D ...............................................15-7

Voice TX Set mode .................................................................15-8

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-2

Previous view

The Voice TX function transmits the recorded audio on

an SD card once, or repeatedly, for up to 10 minutes at

the speciﬁ ed interval.

Up to 4 memories are available for repeated CQ and

exchange transmissions in contests, as well as when

making repeated calls to DX’peditions.

The recorded audio can be transmitted in the SSB, AM

(HF/50 MHz only), FM or DV mode.

The Voice TX function can be assigned to a key on the

optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC or an external

keypad. (p. ??-??)

NOTE: Be sure to insert an SD card into the trans-

ceiver before recording a voice audio.

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

2” (Menu 2) screen.

• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.

Touch [VOICE]( wD) to select the Voice TX mode.

• The “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.

Push eMENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.

Touch [REC]( rD) to display the “VOICE TX RECORD”

screen.

Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4]. t

• The “VOICE TX RECORD (T1)” screen is displayed,

when [T1] memory is selected.

Touch [ y●](D) to start recording.

• Touch [■](D) to cancel recording.

• The maximum record time is 90 seconds.

• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) from your

mouth, then speak at a normal voice level.

• Touch [MIC GAIN](D) to display the “MIC GAIN” screen.

• If you record again on the same channel, the current con-

tents will be overwritten.

Touch [ u](C) to return to the “VOICE TX RECORD”

screen.

Information ✓

To delete the recorded au-

dio, touch the center of the

“VOICE TX RECORD (T1)”

through “VOICE TX RECORD

(T4)” screen for 1 second, or

push

QUICK

(C), and then

touch “Clear.”

Recording the voice audio

Touch

[VOICE]

Touch [REC]

(Example)

Touch [T1]

Push MENU

Touch [●]

The “MIC GAIN”

screen appears

after touching

Shows the audio input level.

While recording

Adjust so the

REC level bar

does not reach

this level.

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-3

Previous view

Playing back the recorded voice audio

The recorded voice audio for the Voice TX function can

be played back.

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

2” (Menu 2) screen.

• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.

Touch [VOICE]( wD) to select the Voice TX mode.

• The “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.

Push eMENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.

Touch [REC]( rD) to display the “VOICE TX RECORD”

screen.

Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4]. t

• The “VOICE TX RECORD (T1)” screen is displayed,

when [T1] memory is selected.

Touch [ y≈](D) to start the playback.

• Touch [■](D) to stop the playback.

Touch [ u](C) to return to the “VOICE TX RECORD”

screen.

Touch

[VOICE]

Touch [REC]

(Example)

Touch [T1]

Push MENU

Touch [≈]

While playing

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-4

Previous view

Each Voice TX memory, [T1] through [T4], can be pro-

grammed with an alphanumeric name of up to 16 char-

acters.

[EXAMPLE]: Programming the memory name “Con-

test” in [T1].

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

2” (Menu 2) screen.

• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.

Touch [VOICE]( wD) to select the Voice TX mode.

• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.

Push eMENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.

Touch [REC]( rD) to display the “VOICE TX RECORD”

screen.

Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4], tfor 1

second to program.

Touch [Edit Name] to display the “VOICE TX RE- y

CORD (T1)” screen (Voice TX name edit screen).

• A cursor appears and blinks.

Touch the desired block one or more times to uselect

the desired character or symbol.

Selectable characters and symbols

A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^

+ – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @ (space)

• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input

and Number input mode.

• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol

or number.

• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selec-

tion window.

• Touch “” to input a space.

Programming a memory name

Touch

[Edit Name].

Touch [REC]

(Example)

Touch [T1] for

1 second.

Continued on the next page. ☞

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

Input a space

Move the cursor

Delete a character

Select an

input mode

Enter

Cancel edit

Move the cursor

Input mode screen

Touch [!"#] to

open the Symbol

character selec-

tion window.

Memory name edit screen

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-5

Previous view

Programming a memory name (Continued)

After programming,

touch [ENT]

Touch [] to can-

cel the “VOICE

TX RECORD”

screen

Touch [ i](D) to move the cursor backwards, or

touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.

Repeat steps ou and i to program up to 16 char-

acters memory name, and then touch [ENT](D) to

save the name, and return to the “VOICE TX RE-

CORD” screen.

!0 Touch [](D) to return to the “VOICE TX RECORD”

screen.

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-6

Previous view

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

2” (Menu 2) screen.

• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.

Touch [VOICE]( wD) to select the Voice TX mode.

• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.

Push eMENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.

r<<Single TX>>

Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4] to

transmit the recorded voice audio once.

<<Repeat TX>>

Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4] for 1

second to repeatedly transmit the recorded voice

audio for up to 10 minutes at the interval specified in

“Repeat Time.”

• Even if 10 minutes pass while transmitting, the voice au-

dio is completely transmitted.

• During the Voice TX waiting, the selected memory

blinks.

• One of the following steps will cancel the transmission.

- Touch the memory again.

- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.

- Touch another memory (except for [LEVEL]).

- Push

(C),

XFC

(R) or

SET

(C).

- Push

QUICK

(C).

The repeat transmission is cancelled. But while trans-

mitting, the voice audio is completely transmitted.

• Once the Repeat TX is made, the transceiver pauses

until the end of the “Repeat Time,” then transmits again.

After the second transmission, the Repeat TX continues

pausing, if receiving a signal.

But if the squelch is manually opened, the voice audio is

repeatedly transmitted, according to the repeat time set-

ting.

• Voice TX Waiting screen for <<Repeat TX>>

Transmitting the recorded voice audio

Blinks while

transmitting

Touch

[VOICE]

Touch the

desired

memory,

Single TX

Repeat TX

Blinks

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-7

Previous view

Adjusting the TX volume level D

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

2” (Menu 2) screen.

• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.

Touch [VOICE]( wD) to select the Voice TX mode.

• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.

Touch [LEVEL]( eD) to display the “TX LEVEL”

screen.

Rotate the Dial to adjust the transmit voice level. r

• Too high of a voice level may cause interference.

• Touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the default set-

ting (50 %), if desired.

Touch [LEVEL]( tD) to save, and exit the “TX LEVEL”

screen.

Transmitting the recorded voice audio (Continued)

Touch

[VOICE]

Touch

[LEVEL]

Rotate the Dial

to adjust

Exits the “TX LEVEL”

screen.

Reset to the

default setting

Hiding the Voice TX memory name

The voice TX memory name can be hidden on the

“VOICE TX” screen.

Push q

SET

Touch the “VOICE TX Name Display” item of the w

“Display” Set mode.

( Display > VOICE TX Name Display)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch “OFF.” e

Push r

SET

The voice TX memory

name is displayed.

The voice TX memory

name is not displayed.

When “ON” is selected. When “OFF” is selected.

Setting the VOICE ﬁ rst menu screen

Select the first appearance screen after touching

[VOICE](D).

Push q

SET

Touch the “VOICE 1st menu” item of the “Function” w

Set mode.

( Function > VOICE 1st menu)

• If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)

one or more times to select the page.

Touch the desired option. e

• VOICE-Root: Displays the “VOICE” screen ﬁ rst.

• VOICE-TX: Displays the “VOICE TX” screen ﬁ rst.

Push r

SET

“M-2” (Menu 2) screen

Displays the “VOICE”

screen ﬁ rst.

Displays the “VOICE TX”

screen ﬁ rst.

After touching [VOICE].

When “VOICE-Root” is

selected.

When “VOICE-TX” is

selected.

15 VOICE TX FUNCTION

15-8

Previous view

Repeat Time (Default: 5sec)

Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 15 seconds (in

1 second steps) for the voice repeat transmission.

The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded

voice audio at this interval.

Auto Monitor (Default: ON)

Turn the TX Monitor function ON or OFF.

• OFF: The TX voice audio is not heard from the speak-

er.

• ON: The TX voice audio is heard from the speaker.

Touch

[VOICE]

Touch [SET]

Touch a de-

sired item.

( Example: Re-

peat Time)

Touch a de-

sired option.

( Example:

7sec)

Push MENU

Voice TX Set mode

Push qMENU (C) one or more times to select the “M-

2” (Menu 2) screen.

• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.

Touch [VOICE]( wD) to select the Voice TX mode.

• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.

Push eMENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.

Touch [SET]( rD) to display the “VOICE TX SET”

screen.

Touch a desired item. t

Touch a desired option. y

• See the descriptions below for details of items and op-

tions.

• Push QUICK (C), and then touch “Default” to reset to the

default setting, if desired.

Push uMENU (C) to return to the “VOICE” screen.

Front panel ......................................................................................... 00

16-1

Section 16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

Previous view

16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

16-2

Previous view

Connecting the antenna tuner

To Long wire

To optional AH-2b

Ground

AH-4

To [ANT]

IC-7200

To [TUNER]

Ground*

ANT

Antenna

element

To [TRANSCEIVER]

To [ANT]

To [ACC]

AT-180

To [ANT] To [ACC]*

Ground

HF/6 m antenna

Coaxial cable supplied

with the AT-180

ACC cable supplied with the AT-180

Coaxial cable

Ground

IC-7100 *Either of the two

external connectors

* Use as thick and short a wire as possible

between the AH-4 and ground.

Connecting an AH-4 D

The optional AH-4 matches the IC-7100 to a long

wire antenna more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and

above).

• See page ??-?? for operation.

• See the AH-4 instruction manual installation and an-

tenna connection details.

The AH-4 and AT-180 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

matches the IC-7100 to the connected antenna auto-

matically.

Once the tuner matches an antenna, the variable ca-

pacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for

each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when

you change the frequency range, the variable capaci-

tors are automatically preset to the memorized point.

NOTE: Before connecting, be sure to turn OFF the

transceiver’s power.

Connecting an AT-180 D

The optional AT-180 matches the IC-7100 to both HF

and 50 MHz antenna, and automatically tunes the an-

tenna (impedance range: 16.7 to 150 ø) during trans-

mission when the antenna SWR is less than 1.5:1.

• See page ??-?? for operation.

16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

16-3

Previous view

Connector information for the ACC(2) socket D

PIN LAYOUT

PIN NO./

NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

(Front panel view)

8 V qRegulated 8 V output when the Band Voltage

modiﬁ cation is performed. (p. ??-??) Same as ACC pin q.

GND wConnects to ground. –

HSEND e

Input/output pin.

Goes to ground when transmitting

When grounded, transmits.

Same as ACC pin e.

NC rNo connection. –

ALC tALC output voltage Same as ACC pin y.

NC yNo connection. –

13.8 V u13.8 V output when power is ON Same as ACC pin i.

Speciﬁ cations for the AH-4 D

Frequency coverage : 7–54 MHz (with an AH-2b)

3.5–54 MHz (with more than

7 meters long wire)

Input impedance : 50 ȍ

Maximum input power : 120 W

Minimum tuning power : 10 W (5–15 W)

Tuning accuracy : Less than SWR 2:1

Power supply requirements

: 13.8 V DC/1 A (supplied from

the transceiver’s ACC socket)

Dimensions (mm/in) :

172(W) u 69.5(H) u 230(D)

6.7 (W) u 2.7(H) u 9.0(D)

Weight (Approximately) : 1.2 kg; 2.6 lb

Supplied accessories : See the AH-4 instruction

manual

Speciﬁ cations for the AT-180 D

Frequency coverage : 1.8–54 MHz

Input impedance : 50 ȍ

Maximum input power : 120 W

Minimum tuning power : 8 W

Matching impedance range

: 16.7–150 ȍ (HF band)

20–125 ȍ (50 MHz band)

Tuning accuracy : Less than SWR 1.5:1

Insertion loss : Less than 1.0 dB

(after tuning)

Power supply requirements

: 13.8 V DC/1 A (supplied from

the transceiver’s ACC socket)

Dimensions (mm/in) :

167(W) u 58.6(H) u 225(D)

6.6(W) u 2.3(H) u 8.9(D)

Weight (Approximately) : 2.3 kg; 5.1 lb

Supplied accessories : ACC cable (DIN 13 pins)

Coaxial cable (1 m),

Connecting the antenna tuner (Continued)

16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

16-4

Previous view

Operating the AH-4

Before operating D

R DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE!

NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning or

transmitting.

Always place it in a secure place.

NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna connect-

ed. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.

NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is ungrounded.

Transmitting before tuning may damage the transceiver.

Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a 1⁄2O long

wire or on a multiple of that frequency.

Operating D

Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to retune

the antenna before transmitting when you change the

frequency—even slightly.

Push q

TUNER/CALL

(L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the re-

mote control microphone to turn ON the AH-4.

The CW mode and 10 W output power are automati-

cally selected, and the tuning starts.

• The TX indicator lights red.

• “ ” blinks while tuning.

• After changing the frequency, you should hold down

TUNER/CALL

(L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the remote control

microphone for second to manually start tuning. In this

case, the CW mode and 10 W output power are auto-

matically selected, and the TX indicator lights red.

NOTE: DO NOT change the frequency and oper-

ating mode while “ ” is blinking. It may takes

approximately 2 to 3 seconds (maximum of 15

seconds) to complete tuning.

w“ ” is still ON after the tuning is completed, and

the previously selected operating mode and the out-

put power are automatically selected.

• When the connected wire cannot be tuned, “ ” goes

out, the AH-4 is bypassed and the antenna wire is di-

rectly connected.

PTT tune function D

The AH-4 always tunes when [PTT] is pushed after the

frequency is changed on an HF band (more than 1%).

Turn ON this function in the Set mode.

(Function > Tuner > PTT Start)

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

TUNER/CALL

[TUNER/CALL]

16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

16-5

Previous view

Operating the AT-180

Before operating D

CAUTION:

• NEVER transmit with the tuner ON if no antenna is

connected. This will damage both the transceiver

and antenna tuner.

• NEVER transmit with the tuner ON if no antenna is

connected. This will damage both the transceiver

and antenna tuner.

NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna connect-

ed. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.

NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is ungrounded.

Transmitting before tuning may damage the transceiver.

Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a 1⁄2O long

wire or on a multiple of that frequency.

16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

16-6

Previous view

Operating D

The AT-180 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER automatically

matches to your antenna. Once the tuner matches the

antenna, the variable capacitor settings are memorized

as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz

steps). Therefore, when you change the frequency

range, the variable capacitors are automatically preset

to the memorized point.

NOTE:

• The AT-180 can match both the HF and 50 MHz

bands. However, operation is different for the

bands.

• When connecting the AT-180, the transceiver’s out-

put power should be more than 8 W. Otherwise, the

AT-180 may not tune correctly. The AT-180’s mini-

mum operating input power is 8 W.

Check the transceiver’s output power is set to 8 W/ q

Push w

TUNER/CALL

(L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the re-

mote control microphone to turn ON the AT-180.

• “ ” appears.

For the HF band:

The antenna is automatically tuned during transmit if

the antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.

For the 50 MHz band:

“” blinks if the antenna SWR is higher than

1.5:1, regardless of the internal switch position de-

scribed on the page ??-??. In this case, do the step

e to manually tune the antenna.

• If you continue to transmit without retuning, “ ” goes

out after approximately 10 seconds, the AH-4 is bypassed

and the antenna wire is directly connected.

Push e

TUNER/CALL

(L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the re-

mote control microphone for 1 second to start man-

ual tuning.

• When the CW mode is selected, a side tone is emitted,

and “ ” blinks.

NOTE: DO NOT change the frequency and oper-

ating mode while “ ” is blinking.

r“ ” is still ON after the tuning is completed, and

the previously selected operating mode is automati-

cally selected.

• When the connected wire cannot be tuned, “ ” goes

out, the AH-4 is bypassed and the antenna wire is di-

rectly connected.

Once the tuner matches the antenna, the variable

capacitors are automatically preset to the memo-

rized point when you change the frequency range in

100 kHz steps.

• While presetting, “ ” blinks.

Operating the AT-180 (Continued)

TUNER/CALL

[TUNER/CALL]

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

16 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

16-7

Previous view

Setting the AT-180 internal switches

The optional AT-180 has 3 operating conﬁ gurations for

HF band operation. Select a suitable conﬁ gurations for

your antenna system.

q Remove the top cover of the AT-180.

w Set the tuner switches to the desired positions ac-

cording to the table below.

Automatic tuner start D(HF bands only)

If you want to turn OFF the tuner when the VSWR is

1.5:1 or less, use “automatic tuner on” and turn OFF

the tuner. See page 10-11 for automatic tuner function.

PTT tune function D

The AT-180 tunes when [PTT] is pushed after the

frequency is changed (more than 1%) if the AT-180

is turned ON. This function removes the “hold down

TUNER ” operation and activates with the ﬁ rst transmis-

sion on the new frequency. (p. 10-11)

Turn this function ON in the Set mode.

SW Position Operation

(default)

The tuner operating mode is set by S2

described below.

BTHROUGH INHIBIT

The tuner tunes the antenna even when

the antenna has poor SWR (up to VSWR

3:1 after tuning). In this case, manual tun-

ing is necessary each time you change

the frequency although the tuner auto-

matically starts tuning when the VSWR

is higher than 3:1. This setting is called

“through inhibit,” however, the tuner is set

to “through” if the VSWR is higher than

3:1 after tuning.

CTUNER SENSITIVE SETTING

The tuner tunes each time you transmit

(except SSB mode). Therefore, the low-

est SWR is obtained at any given time.

For SSB mode, the same SETTING as

the “D” position.

(default)

NORMAL

The tuner tunes when the SWR is higher

than 1.5:1. Therefore, the tuner activates

only when tuning is necessary.

• AT-180 inside top cover

S2 S1

DC BA

17-1

Section 17 SET MODE

Previous view

Set mode description ............................................................17-2

The Set mode settings

D ..........................................................17-2

Set mode items and Default settings ...................................17-3

Voice Memo Set mode ...........................................................17-11

DV Set mode ..........................................................................17-13

SPEECH Set mode .................................................................17-15

QSO/RX Log Set mode ..........................................................17-16

Function Set mode ................................................................17-18

Tone Control Set mode .........................................................17-23

Connectors Set mode ...........................................................17-24

Display Set mode ...................................................................17-27

Time Set Set mode ................................................................17-30

Others Set mode ....................................................................17-31

17 SET MODE

17-2

Previous view

The Set mode is used to program infrequently changed

values or function settings.

NOTE: The Set mode is constructed in a tree struc-

ture. You may go to the next tree level, or go back a

level, depending on the selected item.

SET

The Set mode settings D

Push q

SET

If the speciﬁ ed item is not displayed, touch [ w∫] or [√]

(D) one or more times to select the page.

• If [∫](D) or [√](D) is continuously held down, the pages

are quickly scrolled.

• Rotating the Dial also selects the pages.

Touch the desired item to go to the next level. e

Repeat steps rw and e to show the desired item’s

setting screen.

• To go back the previous tree level, touch [](D), or

MENU (C).

Touch a desired option shown on the display, or [+]/ t

[–](D) to adjust a level.

• When you touch an option, it is automatically saved and

the screen returns to the previous display.

• Rotating the Dial also adjusts the level.

• Push QUICK (C), and then touch “Default” to reset to the

default setting, if desired.

• To set other item, touch [](D), or MENU (C) to go back

a tree level.

Push y

SET

Set mode description

The L, R, C or D in the

instructions indicate the

part of the controller.

L: Left side

R: Right side

C: Center bottom

D: Display (Touch panel)

Left Right

Center

Display

17 SET MODE

17-3

Previous view

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

Call sign (Section 9) ➥

RX Record (Section 9) ➥

MY Station (Section 7) ➥

SD Card (Section 13) ➥

GPS (Section 10) ➥

Voice Memo In this item, set the TX/RX voice recording options.

QSO Recorder

<<REC Start>>* Starts recording the received audio.

Play Files*

Selects to playback or delete the recorded audio.

Recorder Set

REC Mode TX&RX or RX Only Selects to record the TX audio or not.

RX REC Condition Always or Squelch Auto Selects whether or not the squelch status affects

the RX voice audio recording.

File Split OFF or ON Selects whether or not to automatically create

a new ﬁ le after each transmission, reception, or

each time the squelch opens or closes.

PTT Auto REC OFF or ON Turns the PTT Automatic Recording function ON

or OFF.

Player Set

Skip Time 3sec, 5sec, 10sec or 30sec Sets the Skip time to rewind or forward the re-

corded audio when you push the fast-rewind or

fast-forward key during playback.

DV Auto Reply* Records a voice audio to use for the Auto Reply

function in the DV mode.

* Be sure to insert the SD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

DV Set In this item, set infrequently changed values or functions in the DV mode.

Standby Beep OFF, ON or ON (to me: High Tone) Selects whether or not to sound a beep after a

received signal disappears.

Auto Reply OFF, ON or Voice Selects whether or not to automatically reply to a

call addressed to your own call sign.

DV Data TX PTT or Auto Selects to manually or automatically transmit low

speed data.

Digital Monitor Auto, Digital or Analog Selects the DV mode RX monitoring when [XFC]

is held down.

Digital Repeater Set OFF or ON Turns the digital repeater setting function ON or

OFF. This function is usable in any DV mode ex-

cept the DR mode.

RX Call Sign Write OFF or Auto Turns the RX call sign automatic write function

ON or OFF. This function is usable in any DV

mode except the DR mode.

RX Repeater Write OFF or Auto Turns the repeater call sign automatic write func-

tion ON or OFF. This function is usable in any DV

mode except the DR mode.

DV Auto Detect OFF or ON Turns the DV mode automatic detect function ON

or OFF.

RX Record (RPT) ALL or Latest Only Selects whether to record all calls or only the lat-

est call, when the received signal includes a sta-

tus message (“UR?” or “RPT?”) that is sent back

from the access repeater.

BK OFF or ON Turns the BK (Break-in) function ON or OFF.

The BK function allows you to break into a con-

versation between two stations with call sign

squelch enabled.

EMR OFF or ON Turns the EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request)

communication mode ON or OFF.

After turning OFF the transceiver, the EMR mode

will be cancelled.

EMR AF Level 0%~50%~100% Sets the audio output level when an EMR mode

signal is received.

Set mode items and Default settings

17 SET MODE

17-4

Previous view

SPEECH In this item, set the Speech options.

RX Call Sign SPEECH OFF, ON (Kerchunk) or ON (All) Selects the RX call sign speech function option

while ON, or turn it OFF.

RX>CS SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF.

S-Level SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the Signal Strength Level Speech function

ON or OFF.

MODE SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the Operating Mode Speech function ON

or OFF.

SPEECH Language English or Japanese Selects either English or Japanese as the de-

sired speech language.

Alphabet Normal or Phonetic Code Selects the alphabet character announcement

type.

SPEECH Speed Slow or Fast Selects Slow or Fast speech speed.

SPEECH Level 0%~50%~100% Sets the volume level for the voice synthesizer.

QSO/RX Log In this item, set the QSO/RX History Log options.

QSO Log*1OFF or ON Selects whether or not to make a communication

log on the SD card.

RX History Log*1OFF or ON Selects whether or not to make a DV mode’s re-

ceive history log on the SD card.

CSV Format

Separator/Decimal Sep [,] Dec [.]*2, Sep [;] Dec [.] or Sep

[;] Dec [,]

Selects the separator and the decimal character

for the CSV format.

Date yyyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yyyy*2 or dd/mm/

yyyy

Selects the date format.

*1 Be sure to insert the SD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

*2 The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-5

Previous view

Function In this item, set the function options.

Monitor OFF or ON Selects whether or not to monitor your transmit

signal in any mode other than CW.

Monitor Level 0%~50%~100% Sets the monitor level.

Beep Level 0%~50%~100% Sets the beep output level.

Beep Level Limit OFF or ON Selects whether or not to limit the volume to the

speciﬁ ed level, and further rotation of the [AF]

control will not increase the level.

Beep (Conﬁ rmation) OFF or ON Turns the conﬁ rmation beep tones ON or OFF.

Band Edge Beep OFF, ON (Default), ON (User) or ON

(User) & TX Limit

Selects whether or not to sound a beep when you

tune outside of, or back into the amateur band's

frequency range.

User Band Edge 1: 1.800.000–1.999.999

2: 3.500.000–3.999.999

3: 7.000.000–7.300.000

4: 10.100.000–10.150.000

5: 14.000.000–14.350.000

6: 18.068.000–18.168.000

7: 21.000.000–21.450.000

8: 24.890.000–24.990.000

9: 28.000.000–29.700.000

10: 50.000.000–54.000.000

11:

144.000.000

–

146.000.000

12:

430.000.000

–

440.000.000

13~30: (blank)

Selects the user band frequency range to sound

a beep when the Band Edge Beep function is

set to “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit,” and

you tune outside of, or back into a programmed

range.

RF/SQL Control Auto, SQL or RF+SQL Select the function of the [RF/SQL] control.

TX Delay

HF OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or

30ms

Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to

prevent any external equipment that is connected

from damage by the reﬂ ected wave.

50M OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or

30ms

Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to

prevent any external equipment that is connected

from damage by the reﬂ ected wave.

144M OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or

30ms

Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to

prevent any external equipment that is connected

from damage by the reﬂ ected wave.

430M OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or

30ms

Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to

prevent any external equipment that is connected

from damage by the reﬂ ected wave.

Time-Out Timer OFF, 3min, 5min, 10min, 20min or

30min

Selects the Time-Out Timer time options to pre-

vent an accidental prolonged transmission.

PTT Lock OFF or ON Selects whether or not to inhibit transmission.

SPLIT/DUP

Quick SPLIT OFF or ON Turns the Quick SPLIT function ON or OFF.

SPLIT Offset –9.999 MHz~0.000 MHz~+9.999 MHz Sets the frequency offset for the Split function.

SPLIT LOCK OFF or ON Turns the SPLIT LOCK function ON or OFF.

DUP Offset

0.0000 MHz~9.9999 MHz

( The default value may differ, depend-

ing on the frequency band and the

transceiver version.)

Sets the frequency offset for repeater operation.

One Touch Repeater DUP– or DUP+ Selects the duplex direction for the One Touch

Repeater function.

Auto Repeater OFF, ON (DUP) or ON (DUP,TONE) Turns the Auto Repeater function ON or OFF.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-6

Previous view

Tuner

Auto Start OFF or ON Turns the automatic antenna tuner function ON

or OFF.

PTT Start OFF or ON Turns the PTT Tuner Start function ON or OFF.

[TUNER] Switch Manual or Auto Selects whether or not to store the AT-180’s sta-

tus by each band.

[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch SPEECH/LOCK, LOCK/SPEECH Selects the function for

SPEECH

when pushed

or held down.

Lock Function MAIN DIAL or PANEL Selects the dial lock function to prevent frequen-

cy changes by accidental movement of the tun-

ing dial.

Memopad Numbers 5 or 10 Sets the number of usable memopad channels.

MAIN DIAL Auto TS OFF, LOW or HIGH Selects an option for the automatic tuning step

function. When rapidly rotating the main dial, the

tuning step automatically changes according to

the setting.

MIC Up/Down Speed Slow or Fast Selects the steps per second when changing an

operating frequency by holding down the micro-

phone’s [∫]/[√] key.

[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual Selects the notch function for the SSB mode.

[NOTCH] Switch (AM) Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual Selects the notch function for the AM mode.

SSB/CW Sync Tuning OFF or ON Turns the Synchronous Tuning function ON or

OFF to shift the operating frequency by the offset

amount to keep receiving a signal when the oper-

ating mode is changed between SSB and CW.

CW Normal Side LSB or USB Sets the carrier point for CW normal mode op-

eration to the LSB side or the USB side.

VOICE 1st Menu VOICE-Root or VOICE-TX Select whether or not to directly select the voice

send menu, skipping the voice menu.

KEYER 1st Menu KEYER-Root or KEYER-SEND Select whether or not to directly select the keyer

send menu, skipping the memory keyer menu.

Speaker Out OFF or ON Selects to mute the speaker output.

MIC AF Out OFF or ON Selects to output the received audio from the

[MIC] connector.

RC MIC

[F-1] ---, P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,

RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD,

M-CLR, BANK, SPLIT, A/B, DUP,

TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,

DR, FROM/TO(DR), SCAN, Voice TX

(T1)

The functions listed to the left can be set to [F-1]

of the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.

[F-2] ---, P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,

RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD,

M-CLR, BANK, SPLIT, A/B, DUP,

TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,

DR, FROM/TO(DR), SCAN, Voice TX

(T1)

The functions listed to the left can be set to [F-2]

of the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.

Mode Select  SSB,  CW,  RTTY,  AM,  FM,

 WFM,  DV

(All boxes are checked.)

Disables the mode selection of the optional HM-

151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC, to simplify operation.

Power OFF (With No Controller) OFF or ON Selects whether or not to automatically turn OFF

the transceiver when the controller is disconnect-

ed from the transceiver.

REF Adjust 0 %~100 % Sets a number to adjust for a zero beat with a

standard signal such as WWV or WWVH, for fre-

quency calibration.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-7

Previous view

Tone Control In this item, set the RX/TX tone control options.

SSB

RX HPF/LPF ---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400 Sets the high-pass ﬁ lter or low-pass ﬁ lter of the

receive audio.

RX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the receive audio.

RX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the receive audio.

RX HPF/LPF ---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400 Sets the high-pass ﬁ lter or low-pass ﬁ lter of the

receive audio.

RX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the receive audio.

RX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the receive audio.

RX HPF/LPF ---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400 Sets the high-pass ﬁ lter or low-pass ﬁ lter of the

receive audio.

RX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the receive audio.

RX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the receive audio.

RX HPF/LPF ---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400 Sets the high-pass ﬁ lter or low-pass ﬁ lter of the

receive audio.

RX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the receive audio.

RX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the receive audio.

WFM

RX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the receive audio.

RX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the receive audio.

RX HPF/LPF ---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400 Sets the high-pass ﬁ lter or low-pass ﬁ lter of the

receive audio.

RTTY

RX HPF/LPF ---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400 Sets the high-pass ﬁ lter or low-pass ﬁ lter of the

receive audio.

SSB

TX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.

TX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.

TBW (WIDE) 100, 200, 300, 500 – 2500, 2700,

2800, 2900

Sets the lower and higher cut-off frequencies to

change the transmission passband width for the

wide setting.

TBW (MID) 100, 200, 300, 500 – 2500, 2700,

2800, 2900

Sets the lower and higher cut-off frequencies to

change the transmission passband width for the

mid setting.

TBW (NAR) 100, 200, 300, 500 – 2500, 2700,

2800, 2900

Sets the lower and higher cut-off frequencies to

change the transmission passband width for the

narrow setting.

TX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.

TX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.

TX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.

TX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.

TX Bass –5~0~+5 Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.

TX Treble –5~0~+5 Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-8

Previous view

Connectors In this item, set the external connector’s options.

USB Audio SQL OFF (OPEN) or ON Selects whether or not to output the audio from

the [USB] connector, according to the squelch

state (open or closed).

ACC/USB Output Select AF or IF Sets the [USB] connector and the [ACC] socket

usage to received audio output or the IF output

for DRM (Digital Radio Mondiale).

ACC/USB AF Level 0 %~50 %~100 % Sets the audio output level at the [ACC] socket

and the [USB] connector.

ACC/USB IF Level 0 %~50 %~100 % Sets the IF output level at the [ACC] socket and

the [USB] connector.

ACC MOD Level 0 %~50 %~100 % Sets the input modulation level at the [ACC]

socket.

DATA MOD Level 0 %~50 %~100 % Sets the input modulation level at the [DATA]

jack.

USB MOD Level 0 %~50 %~100 % Sets the input modulation level at the [USB] con-

nector.

DATA OFF MOD MIC, ACC, MIC,ACC or USB Selects the connector(s) for the desired modula-

tion to input when the data mode is not used.

DATA MOD MIC, ACC, MIC,ACC or USB Selects the connector(s) for the desired modula-

tion to input when the data mode is used.

External Keypad

VOICE OFF or ON Selects whether or not to transmit voice memory

contents using the external keypad.

KEYER OFF or ON Selects whether or not to transmit keyer memory

contents using the external keypad.

RTTY OFF or ON Selects whether or not to transmit RTTY memory

contents using the external keypad.

CI-V

CI-V Baud Rate 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 or Auto Sets the CI-V code transfer speed.

CI-V Address 01h~88h~DFh Sets the transceiver's unique CI-V hexadecimal

address code.

CI-V Transceive OFF or ON Turns the CI-V Transceive function ON or OFF.

USB2/DATA1 Function

USB2 Function OFF, RTTY Decode or DV Data Selects the use of the COM port (USB2).

DATA1 Function OFF, RTTY Decode, DV Data or GPS Select the use of the [DATA1] jack.

GPS Out OFF or DATA1  USB2 Selects whether or not to output the data to the

COM port (USB2) when data is input from a GPS

receiver through the [DATA1] jack.

DV Data/GPS Out Baud 4800 or 9600 Sets the DV or GPS data transfer speed

RTTY Decode Baud 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 or 19200 Sets the RTTY decode monitor speed.

VSEND Select OFF, UHF or VHF/UHF Selects the band to use for the [ACC] socket’s pin

7 (VSEND usage).

9600bps Mode OFF or ON Selects whether or not to allow data transmission

at 9600 bps.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-9

Previous view

Display In this item, set the transceiver’s display options.

LCD Contrast 0%~25%~100% Sets the contrast level of the LCD.

LCD Backlight 0%~50%~100% Sets the backlight level of the LCD.

Key Backlight 0%~50%~100% Sets the backlight level of the key.

Meter Peak Hold OFF or ON Turns the Meter Peak Hold function ON or OFF.

BW Popup (PBT) OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the PBT shifting

value while rotating the TWIN-PBT control.

BW Popup (FIL) OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the IF ﬁ lter width

and shifting value when the IF ﬁ lter is switched.

RX Call Sign Display OFF, Auto or Auto (RX Hold) Selects whether or not to display the call sign of

the caller station when a call is received.

RX Message Display OFF or Auto Selects whether or not to display and scroll a re-

ceived message.

Reply Position Display OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the caller’s po-

sition data when the data is included in the Auto

Replay signal.

TX Call Sign Display OFF, Your Call Sign or My Call Sign Selects whether or not to display My or Your call

sign while transmitting.

Scroll Speed Slow or Fast Sets the scrolling speed of the message, call

sign, or other text, that are displayed on the

transceiver’s LCD.

VOICE TX Name Display OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the voice TX

memory name on the voice TX memory selec-

tion display.

KEYER Memory Display OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the keyer mem-

ory contents on the keyer send selection display.

Opening Message OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the opening

message at power ON.

Power ON Check OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the RF Power,

RIT, Auto Power OFF condition at power ON.

Display Language English or Japanese Sets the screen display language type in the DR

mode or Menu mode.

When the System Language is “English,” this

item disappears.

System Language English or Japanese Sets the system language of the transceiver.

Time Set In this item, set the time options.

Date/Time

DATE 2000/01/01~2099/12/31 Sets the date.

TIME 0:00~23:59 Sets the time.

GPS Time Correct OFF or Auto Selects whether or not to automatically correct

the time data by a received GPS sentence.

UTC Offset –14:00~+9:00~+14:00 Sets the time difference between UTC (Universal

Time Coordinated) and the local time.

Clock Display Local or UTC Sets the clock display mode.

Auto Power OFF OFF, 30min, 60min, 90min or 120min Sets to automatically turn OFF the transceiver

power after no operation is made during this set

period.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-10

Previous view

Others In this item, set other options.

Information

Version Shows the transceiver’s ﬁ rmware version num-

ber.

Clone

Clone Mode Reads or writes the CS-7100 data to or from the

PC, and/or receives data from a Master trans-

ceiver.

Clone Master Mode Writes your IC-7100 (Master) data to another IC-

7100 (Sub).

Touch Screen Calibration Adjusts the touch screen.

Reset

Partial Reset Returns all settings to their default values, with-

out clearing the memory contents, call sign

memories or repeater lists.

All Reset Clears all programming and memories, and re-

turn all settings to their default values.

Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.

The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

17 SET MODE

17-11

Previous view

<<REC Start>>

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > <<REC Start>>

Insert an SD card into the transceiver before select-

ing this item.

Touch [<<REC Start>>] to start voice recording.

• “Recording started.” appears.

• [<<REC Stop>>] is displayed while recording.

Once recording has started, the recording will con-

tinue, even the transceiver is rebooted.

To stop the recording, touch [<<REC Stop>>].

Play Files

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files (PLAY FILES)

Insert an SD card into the transceiver before select-

ing this item.

Do the following steps to play back the recorded audio

on the SD card.

Touch [Play Files], and folders on the SD card are dis-

played.

• These folders contain the stored ﬁ les.

Playing back

Touch [ q∫] or [√], or rotate [DIAL] to select the folder

that includes the desired ﬁ le to play back, and then

touch the folder.

Touch [ w∫] or [√], or rotate [DIAL] to select the ﬁ le to

play back, and then touch the ﬁ le.

• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and the select-

ed ﬁ le is played back.

• See “Operation while playing back” for forwording or re-

winding. (p. ??-??)

Push eMENU or touch [] on the display to stop the

playback.

• Returns to the ﬁ le list screen.

NOTE:

• The folder name is automatically created, as shown

in the example below:

(Example) Recording date: 2013/3/1

Folder name: 20130301

• The ﬁ le name is automatically created, as shown in

the example below:

(Example) Recording date: 2013/3/1 15:30:00

File name: 20130301_153000

• The voice audio is recorded onto an SD card, and

saved in the “wav” format.

The recorded voice audio can also be played back

on a PC.

The extension, “wav,” is not displayed on the trans-

ceiver’s screen.

REC Mode (Default: TX&RX)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > REC

Mode (REC Mode)

Records both the transmitted and received audio as the

default setting.

• TX&RX: Records both the transmitted and received

audio.

• RX Only: Records only the received audio.

When transmitting while recording

When “OFF” is selected in File Split, the recording is

paused. After you stop transmitting, the recording re-

sumes.

When “ON” is selected in File Split, a new ﬁ le is auto-

matically created, and the transmitted audio is recorded

into the new one.

RX REC Condition (Default: Squelch Auto)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > RX

REC Condition (RX REC Condition)

Select whether or not the squelch status affects the RX

voice audio recording.

• Always: The transceiver always records the RX

audio regardless of the squelch sta-

tus.

• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records the RX audio

only when a signal is received (the

squelch is opened).

When the squelch closes while record-

ing, the recording will continue for 2

seconds, and then pause.

When “ON” is selected in File Split, and if the squelch

either opens or closes while recording, a new ﬁ le is

automatically created.

Voice Memo Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-12

Previous view

File Split (Default: ON)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > File

Split (File Split)

Turn the File Split function ON or OFF.

• OFF: When the recording starts, a new ﬁ le is auto-

matically created in the folder of the SD card.

The audio is continuously recorded into the

ﬁ le, even if transmission and reception, or the

squelch status (open and close) is switched.

If the ﬁ le size exceeds 2 GB, a new ﬁ le is au-

tomatically created in the same folder, and the

audio is recorded there.

• ON: When the recording starts, a new ﬁ le is auto-

matically created in the folder of the SD card.

During recording, and if transmission and re-

ception, or squelch status (open and close) is

switched, a new ﬁ le is automatically created in

the same folder, and the audio is saved into the

new one.

PTT Auto REC (Default: OFF)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > PTT

Auto REC (PTT Auto REC)

Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or

OFF.

Recording starts when a signal is transmitted from an

external speaker microphone, the VOX functions or a

CI-V command is sent.

• OFF: The recording does not start even if a signal is

transmitted.

• ON: The recording automatically starts when a sig-

nal is transmitted.

The recording will stop when:

• No signal is transmitted for 10 seconds after the last

transmission.

• No signal is received for 10 seconds after the last

transmission.

- 10 minutes after the last transmission while the

squelch is open (SSB/CW/RTTY/AM modes.)

- A signal is received within 10 seconds after the last

transmission, the received signal is also recorded.

A signal is received within 10 seconds after the last

reception, the received signal is also recorded.

• The frequency or operating mode is changed while

transmitting.

• The operating method (V/M, CALL, DR, M-CH, Band

Stacking Register, and so on) has been changed.

Skip Time (Default: 10sec)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Player Set > Skip Time

(Skip Time)

Set the SkipTimer to 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds to rewind

or skip forward for this set period when you push the

fast-rewind or fast-forward key.

• See “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewind-

ing operation. (p. ??-??)

DV Auto Reply

Voice Memo > DV Auto Reply (DV AUTO REPLY)

Up to 10 seconds of audio can be recorded for the au-

tomatic reply function.

See page ??-?? for details of recording audio.

Be sure to insert an SD card into the transceiver be-

fore selecting this item.

Voice Memo Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-13

Previous view

Standby Beep (Default: ON)

DV Set > Standby Beep (Standby Beep)

Turn the standby beep function ON or OFF.

This function sounds a beep after a received signal dis-

appears.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Turns the function ON to sound a beep.

• ON (to me: High Tone):

Turns the function ON to sound a beep. If the

signal is addressed to your call sign, a high

pitch beep sounds.

NOTE:

• Even if “Beep (Confirmation)” of the Function screen

is OFF, the standby beep sounds.

• The standby beep output level can be set in “Beep

Level” of the Function screen.

Auto Reply (Default: OFF)

DV Set > Auto Reply (Auto Reply)

Set the automatic reply function to ON, OFF or Voice.

This function automatically replies to a call addressed

to your own call sign, even if you are away from the

transceiver.

When “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the automatic reply

function is automatically turned OFF when you push

[PTT].

• OFF: The automatic reply function is OFF.

• ON: Replies with your own call sign. (No audio reply

is sent)

• Voice: Replies with your call sign and any Auto Reply

message recorded on the microSD (up to 10

seconds).

If no SD card is inserted or no message is re-

corded, only your call sign is transmitted. The

transmitted audio will be heard from the speak-

er.

DV Data TX (Default: Auto)

DV Set > DV Data TX (DV Data TX)

Select whether to manually or automatically transmit

slow-speed data.

• PTT: Push [PTT] to manually transmit the input data.

• Auto: When data is input from a PC through either the

[USB2] port or [DATA1] jack*, the transceiver

automatically transmits it.

* “USB2 Function” or “USB2 Function” item must

be set to “DV Data.” (p. ??)

Digital Monitor (Default: Auto)

DV Set > Digital Monitor (Digital Monitor)

Select the receive mode when [XFC] is held down in the

DV mode.

• Auto: Receives in the DV mode or the FM mode,

depending on the received signal.

• Digital: Monitors in the DV mode.

• Analog: Monitors in the FM mode.

Digital Repeater Set (Default: ON)

DV Set > Digital Repeater Set (Digital Repeater Set)

Turn the digital repeater setting function ON or OFF.

In any DV mode except for the DR mode, and when ac-

cessing a repeater that has a call sign that is different

than the transceiver’s setting, this function reads the

repeater’s transmit signal and automatically sets the

repeater call sign.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Automatically sets the repeater call sign.

RX Call Sign Write (Default: OFF)

DV Set > RX Call Sign Write (RX Call Sign Write)

Set the RX call sign automatic write function to Auto

or OFF.

When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign

in any DV mode except for the DR mode, this function

automatically sets the caller station call sign into “UR.”

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• Auto: Automatically sets the call sign of the caller sta-

tion into “UR.”

RX Repeater Write (Default: OFF)

DV Set > RX Repeater Write (RX Repeater Write)

Set the repeater call sign automatic write function to

Auto or OFF.

When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign

through a repeater in any DV mode except for the DR

mode, this function automatically sets the call sign of

the repeater into “R1” or “R2.”

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• Auto: Automatically sets the call sign of the repeater

into “R1” and/or “R2.”

DV Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-14

Previous view

DV Auto Detect (Default: OFF)

DV Set > DV Auto Detect (DV Auto Detect)

Turn the DV mode automatic detect function ON or

OFF.

If you receive a non-digital signal during DV mode op-

eration, this function automatically switches to the FM

mode.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF. The operating mode is

ﬁ xed to the DV mode.

• ON: Automatically selects the FM mode for tempo-

rary operation.

RX Record (RPT) (Default: ALL)

DV Set > RX Record (RPT) (RX Record (RPT))

The transceiver can record the data of up to 50 indi-

vidual calls.

When the received signal includes a status message

(“UR?” or “RPT?”) that is sent back from the access

repeater, you can record up to 50 messages or only the

latest one, in the Received Call Record.

• ALL: Records up to 50 calls.

• Latest Only: Records only the latest call.

BK (Default: OFF)

DV Set > BK (BK)

The BK (Break-in) function allows you to break into a

conversation, where the two other stations are commu-

nicating with call sign squelch enabled.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Turns the function ON.

“BK” appears on the display.

NOTE: The BK function is automatically turned OFF

when transceiver is turned OFF.

EMR (Default: OFF)

DV Set > EMR (EMR)

The EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request) communica-

tion mode can be used in the digital mode. In the EMR

mode, no call sign setting is necessary.

When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio

(voice) will be heard at the speciﬁ ed level even if the

volume setting level is set to minimum level, or digital

call sign/digital code squelch is in use.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Turns the function ON.

“EMR” appears on the display.

NOTE: The EMR function is automatically turned

OFF when transceiver is turned OFF.

EMR AF Level (Default: 50%)

DV Set > EMR AF Level (EMR AF Level)

Set the audio output level to between 0% (no audio),

1% (minimum) and 100% (maximum) for when an EMR

communication mode signal is received.

When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be

heard at the set level, or the [AF] control level, which-

ever is higher.

To disable the setting, set it to “0%.”

NOTE: After an EMR signal disappears, the audio

level will remain at the EMR level. In this case, rotate

[AF] to adjust the audio level.

DV Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-15

Previous view

RX Call Sign SPEECH (Default: ON (Kerchunk))

SPEECH > RX Call Sign SPEECH (RX Call Sign

SPEECH)

Turn the RX call sign speech function ON or OFF for

calls received in the DV mode.

• OFF: No announcement is made even

when a call is received.

• ON (Kerchunk): The caller station’s call sign is an-

nounced only when it makes a short

transmission.

• ON (All): The caller station’s call sign is always

announced.

NOTE:

• When the digital squelch function is used, the call-

ing station’s call sign is not announced if the re-

ceived signal is not addressed to your call sign, or

does not include an unmatched digital code.

• When the repeater returns “UR?” or “RPT?,” the

calling station’s call sign is not announced.

• When a call is received during scanning, the scan

resumes even while the transceiver announcing.

• A “/” or a note after a call sign are not announced.

• When a call is received during an announcement,

the received audio is heard after cancelling the an-

nouncement.

RX>CS SPEECH (Default: ON)

SPEECH > RX>CS SPEECH (RX>CS SPEECH)

Turn the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF.

The RX>CS Speech function announces the station

call sign that is selected from a Received Call Record

by holding down

AUTO TUNE

RXCS

. (p. ??-??)

• OFF: The station call sign is not announced.

• ON: The station call sign is announced.

S-Level SPEECH (Default: ON)

SPEECH > MODE SPEECH (MODE SPEECH)

Turn the Signal strength level Speech function ON or

OFF.

• OFF: Only the operating frequency is announced.

• ON: The operating frequency and the signal strength

level are announced.

MODE SPEECH (Default: OFF)

SPEECH > MODE SPEECH (MODE SPEECH)

Turn the Operating Mode Speech function ON or OFF.

When this function is ON, the selected operating mode

is announced when the mode switch is pushed.

• OFF: The selected operating mode is not an-

nounced.

• ON: The selected operating mode is announced.

SPEECH Language (Default: English)

SPEECH > SPEECH Language (SPEECH Language)

Set the desired announcement language to English or

Japanese.

Alphabet (Default: Normal)

SPEECH > Alphabet (Alphabet)

Select either “Normal” or “Phonetic Code” to announce

the alphabet character.

• Normal: Normal code is used. (for example: A

as eh, B as bee)

• Phonetic Code: Phonetic code is used. (for example:

A as Alfa, B as Bravo)

SPEECH Speed (Default: Fast)

SPEECH > SPEECH Speed (SPEECH Speed)

Set the speech speed to Low (slow) or High (fast).

SPEECH Level (Default: 50%)

SPEECH > SPEECH Level (SPEECH Level)

Enter a volume level number between 0% (no voice),

1% (minimum) and 100% (maximum) for the voice syn-

thesizer.

The voice synthesizer audio output level from the

speaker is linked with [AF] setting from the minimum

audio volume up to the set level.

SPEECH Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-16

Previous view

QSO Log (Default: OFF)

QSO/RX Log > QSO Log (QSO Log)

Select whether or not to make a communication log on

the SD card.

The communication log is saved in the “csv” format.

Be sure to insert the SD card into the transceiver be-

fore making a communication log.

• OFF: The QSO Log function is OFF.

• ON: The QSO Log is made on the SD card.

The transceiver starts making a log with your

send contents.

NOTE:

• The folder name is automatically created as [IC-

7100\QsoLog].

• The ﬁ le name is automatically created, as shown in

the example below:

Log start date and time: 2013/3/1 15:30:00

File name: 20130301_153000.csv

• The log contents cannot be displayed on the trans-

ceiver.

• You can see the log contents on an SD card in a

PC. (p. ??-??)

RX History Log (Default: OFF)

QSO/RX Log > RX History Log (RX History Log)

Select whether or not to make a DV mode’s receive his-

tory log on the SD card.

The receive history log can be made on the card, and

saved in the “csv” format. Be sure to insert the card into

the transceiver before making a communication log.

• OFF: The RX History Log function is OFF.

• ON : The transceiver makes a DV mode’s receive his-

tory log on the SD card.

The transceiver starts making a receive history

log when you ﬁ nish to talk.

NOTE:

• The folder name is automatically created as [IC-

7100\RxLog].

• The ﬁ le name is automatically created, as shown in

the example below:

Log start date and time: 2013/3/1 15:30:00

File name: 20130301_153000.csv

• The log contents cannot be displayed on the trans-

ceiver.

• You can see the log contents on an SD card in a

PC. (p. ??-??)

Separator/Decimal (Default: Sep [,] Dec [.]*)

QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Separator/Decimal

(Separator/Decimal)

Select the separator and the decimal character for the

CSV format.

• Sep [,] Dec [.]: Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.” for the

CSV format.

• Sep [;] Dec [.]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.” for

the CSV format.

• Sep [;] Dec [;]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “;” for

the CSV format.

* The default value may differ, depending on the trans-

ceiver version.

Date (Default: mm/dd/yyyy*)

QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Date (Date)

Select the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,” “mm/dd/

yyyy” and “dd/mm/yyyy.” (y: year, m: month, d: day)

* The default value may differ, depending on the trans-

ceiver version.

QSO/RX Log Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-17

Previous view

The QSO log contents are shown below:

Content Example Description

TX/RX TX RX Transmission and reception

Date 12/23/2012

13:51:48

12/23/2012

13:51:48

Date and time the call was started.

Frequency 438.010000 438.010000 Operating frequencies

( When Duplex is set, the frequencies of the called are displayed.)

Mode DV DV Operating mode (All mode)

My Latitude 34.764667 34.764667 Your latitude (unit: degree) +: North latitude, –: South latitude

My Longitude 135.375333 135.375333 Your longitude (unit: degree) +: East longitude, –: West longitude

My Altitude 50.5 50.5 Your altitude (unit: ft) Records to one decimal place.

RF Power 100% (Blank) TX output power level

S Meter (Blank) S0

The relative signal strength of the receive signal (in sixteen levels)

RPT Call Sign JP3YHJ A JP3YHJ A Repeater call sign (DV mode only)

TX Call Sign CQCQCQ (Blank)

TX Call sign

(DV mode only)

RX Call Sign (Blank) JA3YUA A

RX Call sign

(DV mode only)

RX Latitude (Blank) 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: North latitude, –: South latitude

Records

only when you receive in the DV mode.

RX Longitude (Blank) 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: East longitude, –: West longitude

Records

only when you receive in the DV mode.

RX Altitude (Blank) 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)

Records

only when you receive in the DV mode.

The RX History log contents are shown below:

Content Example Description

Frequency 438.010000 RX Frequency

Mode DV Operating mode (DV is ﬁ xed)

Caller JA3YUA A Call sign of the caller station

/ 7100 Note after the call sign

Called CQCQCQ Call sign of the called station

Rx RPT1 JP3YHH G

Access repeater call sign of the caller station or the gateway repeater call sign

of your local area repeater.

Rx RPT2 JP3YHJ A Access repeater call sign of the called station

Message Hello CQ D-STAR! Message included in the received call (up to 20 characters)

Status (Blank)

Normal: blank, Uplink: UPLINK,

Access repeater reply: “UR?” or “RPT?”

Received date 12/23/2012

13:51:48

Date and time the call was received

Depending on the setting, the format may differ.

BK * BK call:

“

”, Normal call: Blank

EMR * EMR call:

“

”, Normal call: Blank

Latitude 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: North latitude, –: South latitude

Longitude 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: East longitude, –: West longitude

Altitude 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)

SSID -A Records one of 0, -1 to -15 and -A to -Z.

GPS-A Symbol Car Icon: Converts to text

None: Code

Course 123 Caller’s course (unit: degree)

GPS Time Stamp 12:00:00 Time data that the caller station acquires the position data

GPS Message

Osaka City/IC-7100

Caller is “DV-G”: Records the GPS message

Caller is “DV-A: Records the GPS-A comment

QSO/RX Log Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-18

Previous view

Monitor (Default: OFF)

Function > Monitor (Monitor)

Turn the monitor function ON or OFF.

This function allows you to monitor your transmit signal

in any mode other than CW.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Monitors your transmit signal.

Monitor Level (Default: 50%)

Function > Monitor Level (Monitor Level)

Adjust a transmit signal monitor level number between

0% (no audio), 1% (minimum) and 100% (maximum)

for the voice synthesizer.

Beep Level (Default: 50%)

Function > Beep Level (Beep Level)

Adjust the conﬁ rmation and band edge beep tones out-

put level to between 0% (no beep), 1% (minimum) and

100% (maximum).

Beep Level Limit (Default: ON)

Function > Beep Level Limit (Beep Level Limit)

Turn the conﬁ rmation and band edge beep tones out-

put level limiting ON or OFF.

When you set this item to ON, the beep tones are

adjusted by the [AF] control until rotating the control

reaches to the speciﬁ ed level. Further rotation will not

increase the volume of the beep tones.

• OFF: Beep level adjustment is not limited.

• ON: Beep level adjustment is limited with the [AF]

control.

Beep (Conﬁ rmation) (Default: ON)

Function > Beep (Conﬁ rmation) (Beep (Conﬁ rmation))

Turn the conﬁ rmation beep ON or OFF.

Set the beep output level in the “Beep Level” item as

described above.

• OFF: The conﬁ rmation beep is OFF. (Silent opera-

tion)

• ON: The conﬁ rmation beep sounds each time a

switch is pushed.

Band Edge Beep (Default: ON (Default))

Function > Band Edge Beep (Band Edge Beep)

When you tune into or out of an amateur band’s fre-

quency range, you can hear a beep tone.

If you select “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit,” you

can program a total of 30 band edge frequencies in the

“User band Edge” item.

You can set the beep output level in the “Beep Level”

item as described to the left.

• OFF: Band edge beep is OFF

• ON (Default): When you tune into or out of the de-

fault amateur band’s frequency range,

a beep sounds.

• ON (User): When you tune into or out of a user pro-

grammed amateur band’s frequency

range, a beep sounds.

• ON (User) & TX Limit:

When you tune into or out of a user pro-

grammed amateur band’s frequency

range, a beep sounds.

In addition, transmission is inhibited

outside the programmed range.

User Band Edge (Default: ??)

Function > User Band Edge (User Band Edge)

This “User Band Edge” item appears only when “ON

(User)” or “User (ON) & TX Limit” is selected in the

“Band Edge Beep” item.

When you select “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit”

in the “Band Edge Beep” item, you can program a total

of 30 band edge frequencies in this item.

See page ??-?? for programming details.

RF/SQL Control (Default: RF+SQL)

Function > RF/SQL Control (RF/SQL Control)

Set the [RF/SQL] control operation.

• AUTO: [RF/SQL] functions as only an RF gain con-

trol in SSB, CW and RTTY; a squelch con-

trol in AM, FM, WFM and DV.

• SQL: [RF/SQL] functions as a squelch control.

• RF+SQL: [RF/SQL] functions not only as an RF gain

control, but also as a squelch control in all

modes.

Function Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-19

Previous view

TX Delay (Default: All bands; OFF)

Function > TX Delay (TX Delay)

Sets the transmission’s timing for each operating

band.

If the external equipment initiates its transmission later

than the transceiver, reﬂ ected wave may occur. This

may damage the external equipment.

Delaying the timing prevents the reﬂ ected waving.

• OFF: The transmission timing is normal.

• 10 to 30ms: The transmission delays within the set

period of time (10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 mil-

liseconds).

Time-Out Timer (Default: OFF)

Function > Time-Out Timer (Time-Out Timer)

To prevent accidental prolonged transmission, the

transceiver has a time-out timer.

The function inhibits continuous transmissions longer

than the set time period.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• 3 to 30 min: The transmission is cut OFF after the set

time period ends (3, 5, 10, 20 or 30 min-

utes).

PTT Lock (Default: OFF)

Function > PTT Lock (PTT Lock)

Turn the PTT lock function ON and OFF.

To prevent accidental transmissions, this function dis-

ables [PTT].

Quick SPLIT (Default: ON)

Function > SPLIT/DUP > Quick SPLIT (Quick SPLIT)

Turn the Quick Split function ON or OFF.

When this item is set to ON, hold down [SPLIT] for 1

second to shift the transmit frequency from the receive

frequency, according to the “SPLIT Offset” option as

described below. See page ??-?? for details.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Holding down [SPLIT] for 1 second quickly se-

lects split frequency operation.

SPLIT Offset (Default: 0.000 MHz)

Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT Offset (SPLIT Offset)

Set the offset* for the quick split function.

*The difference between transmit and receive frequencies.

The frequency offset can be set to between –9.999

MHz and +9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

SPLIT LOCK (Default: OFF)

Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT LOCK (SPLIT LOCK)

Turn the Split Lock function ON or OFF.

When this item is set to ON, you can use [MAIN DIAL]

to adjust the transmit frequency while holding down

[XFC], even while the Dial Lock function is enabled.

To prevent accidentally changing the receive frequency

by rotating the main dial, use both the SPLIT LOCK

and Dial Lock functions.

See pages ??-?? and ??-?? for split frequency opera-

tion details.

DUP Offset (Default: 0.1000 MHz)

Function > SPLIT/DUP > DUP Offset (DUP Offset)

Set the offset* for duplex operation. You can set the re-

peater offset for each band.

*The difference between transmit and receive frequencies.

Before selecting this item, select the desired fre- ➥

quency band. Then, set the offset.

• The frequency offset can be set to between 0.0000 MHz

and 9.9999 MHz.

The default value may differ, depending on the se-

lected frequency band and transceiver version.

NOTE:

• The shift direction can be set with [DUP] on M1 (M1

Menu) screen.

• You can use this setting only when the Split function

is OFF.

• If the DR mode is selected before selecting this

item, editing is restricted.

One Touch Repeater (Default: DUP–)

Function > SPLIT/DUP > One Touch Repeater (One

Touch Repeater)

Set the one touch repeater shift direction.

• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the

receive frequency by the offset amount.

• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the re-

ceive frequency by the offset amount.

Function Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-20

Previous view

Auto Repeater

Function > SPLIT/DUP > Auto Repeater (Auto Repeat-

er)

This item appears only in the Korean and U.S.A. ver-

sion transceivers.

The auto repeater function automatically turns the du-

plex operation and tone encoder* ON or OFF.

The offset and repeater tone* are not changed by the

auto repeater function. Reset these setting values, if

necessary.

For Korean versions

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encod-

er*. (Default)

For U.S.A. version

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON (DUP): Turns ON the duplex operation

only. (Default)

• ON (DUP, TONE): Turns ON the duplex operation and

tone encoder*.

* The tone encoder will not be turned ON in the DV mode.

Auto Start (Default: OFF)

Function > Tuner > Auto Start (Tuner (Auto Start))

Turn the Automatic Antenna Tuner function ON or OFF

for an external antenna tuner (like the optional AT-180).

This function is for only the HF bands.

• OFF: Tuning starts only when

TUNER/CALL

is pushed.

• ON: The external antenna tuner automatically starts

tuning when the SWR is high, even if the tuner

is turned OFF.

PTT Start (Default: OFF)

Function > Tuner > PTT Start (Tuner (PTT Start))

When [PTT] is pushed after the operating frequency is

changed more than 1% from the last tuned frequency,

the external antenna tuner (optional AH-4 or AT-180)

automatically starts tuning.

• OFF: Tuning starts only when

TUNER/CALL

is pushed.

• ON : (AH-4) Automatically starts tuning when [PTT] is

pushed on a new frequency, whether the

external antenna tuner is ON or OFF

(AT-180) Automatically starts tuning when [PTT]

is pushed on a new frequency, only if

the internal antenna tuner is ON

[TUNER] Switch (Default: Auto)

Function > Tuner > [TUNER] Switch ([TUNER] Switch)

Select whether or not to store the AT-180’s status on

each band.

When you change the operating frequency, this func-

tion will automatically select the correct AT-180’s status,

or you must do it manually.

• Manual: You must manually change the AT-180’s sta-

tus by pushing [TUNER].

• Auto: The AT-180’s status memorized by the band

memory is automatically selected. You can

also manually change it by pushing [TUN-

ER].

[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch (Default: SPEECH/LOCK)

Function > [SPEECH/LOCK] Switch ([SPEECH/LOCK]

Switch)

Select the

SPEECH

switch action.

• SPEECH/LOCK: Pushing

SPEECH

turns ON the

voice synthesizer function.

Holding down

SPEECH

turns the

dial lock function ON or OFF.

• LOCK/SPEECH: Pushing

SPEECH

turns the dial lock

function ON or OFF.

Holding down

SPEECH

turns ON

the voice synthesizer function.

Lock Function (Default: MAIN DIAL)

Function > Lock Function (Lock Function)

The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by

accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-

tion electronically locks the dial.

• MAIN DIAL: When Lock Function is activated, the

Dial is disabled.

• PANEL: When Lock Function is activated, the

panel is disabled.

Functions except for [AF], [RF/SQL],

[PWR], [SPEECH/LOCK] are inhibited.

Memopad Numbers (Default: 5)

Function > Memopad Numbers (Memopad Numbers)

Set the number of usable memopad channels to either

5 or 10.

See page ??-?? for details.

Function Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-21

Previous view

MAIN DIAL Auto TS (Default: HIGH)

Function > MAIN DIAL Auto TS (MAIN DIAL Auto TS)

Set the Auto Tuning Step function for the Dial.

When rapidly rotating the Dial, the tuning step auto-

matically changes as selected.

There are two types of auto tuning steps: LOW (Faster)

and HIGH (Fastest).

• OFF: Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

• LOW: Approximately 2 times faster.

• HIGH: Approximately 5 times faster when the tuning

step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps; approxi-

mately 2 times faster when the tuning step is

set to 5 kHz or larger steps.

MIC Up/Down Speed (Default: Fast)

Function > MIC Up/Down Speed (MIC Up/Down

Speed)

Set the rate at which frequencies are tuned while hold-

ing down the microphone [∫]/[√] switches.

• Slow: Low speed (25 tuning steps/second)

• Fast: High speed (50 tuning steps/second)

[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) (Default: Auto/Manual)

Function > [NOTCH] Switch (SSB) ([NOTCH] Switch

(SSB))

Select the Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual notch ﬁ lter to

be used for SSB mode operation.

• Auto: Only the Auto notch ﬁ lter can be used.

• Manual: Only the Manual notch ﬁ lter can be

used.

• Auto/Manual: Both the Auto and Manual notch ﬁ lters

can be used.

[NOTCH] Switch (AM) (Default: Auto/Manual)

Function > [NOTCH] Switch (AM) ([NOTCH] Switch

(AM))

Select the Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual notch ﬁ lter to

be used for AM mode operation.

• Auto: Only the Auto notch ﬁ lter can be used.

• Manual: Only the Manual notch ﬁ lter can be

used.

• Auto/Manual: Both the Auto and Manual notch ﬁ lters

can be used.

SSB/CW Sync Tuning (Default: OFF)

Function > SSB/CW Sync Tuning (SSB/CW Sync Tun-

ing)

Turn the displayed frequency shift function ON or OFF.

When this function is turned ON, the audio pitch or

tones of the received signal will remain the same, even

when the operating mode is changed between SSB

and CW.

The amount of frequency shift may differ, depending on

the CW pitch setting.

• OFF: The displayed frequency does not shift.

• ON: The displayed frequency shifts when the operat-

ing mode is changed between SSB and CW.

CW Normal Side (Default: LSB)

Function > CW Normal Side (CW Normal Side)

Select the sideband used to receive CW in the CW nor-

mal mode between LSB and USB.

VOICE 1st Menu (Default: VOICE-TX)

Function > VOICE 1st Menu (VOICE 1st Menu)

Select VOICE-Root or VOICE-TX as the menu that ap-

pears ﬁ rst after touching [VOICE] in the “M2” screen

(Menu 2), when the SSV, AM, FM or DV mode is se-

lected.

• VOICE-Root: The voice menu appears ﬁ rst.

• VOICE-TX: The voice SEND menu appears ﬁ rst.

KEYER 1st Menu (Default: KEYER-SEND)

Function > KEYER 1st Menu (KEYER 1st Menu)

Select KEYER-Root or KEYER-SEND as the menu

that appears ﬁ rst after touching [KEYER] in the “M2”

screen (Menu 2), when in the CW mode.

• KEYER-Root: The Memory keyer menu appears

ﬁ rst.

• KEYER-SEND: The Keyer SEND menu appears ﬁ rst.

Speaker Out (Default: ON)

Function > Speaker Out (Speaker Out)

Select the speaker output function.

• OFF: The speaker does not output the received au-

dio.

The [ACC] socket, [USB] port, and [MIC] con-

nector output the received audio.

• ON: The speaker outputs the received audio.

Function Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-22

Previous view

MIC AF Out (Default: OFF)

Function > MIC AF Out (MIC AF Out)

Select the [MIC] connector output function.

• OFF: The [MIC] connector does not output the re-

ceived audio.

When using the optional HM-151 REMOTE CON-

TROL MIC, select “OFF.”

• ON: The [MIC] connector outputs the received au-

dio.

When using a speaker microphone or headset,

select “OFF.”

[F-1] (Default: SPLIT)

Function > RC MIC > [F-1] ([F-1])

The function listed below can be assigned to [F-1] on

the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.

• --(No function), P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,

RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD, M-CLR, BANK,

SPLIT, A/B, DUP, TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,

DR, FROM/TO (DR), SCAN, Voice TX (T1)

[F-2] (Default: A/B)

Function > RC MIC > [F-2] ([F-2])

The function listed below can be assigned to [F-2] on

the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.

• --(No function), P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,

RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD, M-CLR, BANK,

SPLIT, A/B, DUP, TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,

DR, FROM/TO (DR), SCAN, Voice TX (T1)

Mode Select (Default: All mode)

Function > RC MIC > Mode Select (Mode Select)

Disables the mode selection with the optional HM-151

REMOTE CONTROL MIC, to simplify operation.

• SSB, CW, RTTY, AM, FM, WFM, DV

Power OFF (With No Controller) (Default: ON)

Function > Power OFF (With No Controller) (Power

OFF (With No Controller))

Select to automatically turn OFF the transceiver when

the controller is disconnected from the transceiver.

• OFF: The transceiver power is ON.

• ON: The transceiver is automatically turned OFF.

REF Adjust

Function > REF Adjust (REF Adjust)

During frequency calibration, set the internal reference

frequency to between 0% and 100% range.

NOTE:

The default setting is different for each transceiver.

Function Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-23

Previous view

RX HPF/LPF (Default: [----] - ----)

Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX HPF/LPF (RX HPF/

LPF)

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM/DV)

First select the operating mode, then set the receive

audio high-pass ﬁ lter to between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

in 100 Hz steps.

RX HPF/LPF (Default: ---- - [----])

Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX HPF/LPF (RX HPF/

LPF)

(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM/DV)

First select the operating mode, then set the receive

audio low-pass ﬁ lter to between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

in 100 Hz steps.

RX Bass (Default: 0)

Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX Bass (RX Bass)

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/WFM/DV)

First select the operating mode, then set the receive

audio bass level to between –5 and +5.

RX Treble (Default: 0)

Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX Treble (RX Treble)

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/WFM/DV)

First select the operating mode, then set the receive

audio treble level to between –5 and +5.

TX Bass (Default: 0)

Tone Control > TX > (Mode) > TX Bass (TX Bass)

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/DV)

First select the operating mode, then set the transmit

audio bass level to between –5 and +5.

TX Treble (Default: 0)

Tone Control > TX > (Mode) > TX Treble (TX Treble)

(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/DV)

First select the operating mode, then set the transmit

audio treble level to between –5 and +5.

TBW (WIDE) (Default: 100 - 2900)

Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (WIDE) (TBW

(WIDE))

(Mode: SSB)

Set the lower and higher cut-off frequencies of the

transmission passband width for your wide setting.

• Lower: 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz

• Higher: 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz

TBW (MID) (Default: 300 - 2700)

Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (MID) (TBW (MID))

(Mode: SSB)

Set the lower and higher cut-off frequencies of the

transmission passband width for your middle setting.

• Lower: 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz

• Higher: 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz

TBW (NAR) (Default: 500 - 2500)

Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (NAR) (TBW (NAR))

(Mode: SSB)

Set the lower and higher cut-off frequencies of the

transmission passband width for your narrow setting.

• Lower: 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz

• Higher: 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz

Tone Control Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-24

Previous view

USB Audio SQL (Default: OFF (OPEN))

Connectors > USB Audio SQL (USB Audio SQL)

Select whether or not to output the audio from the

[USB] connector on the rear panel, according to the

squelch state.

The same audio signals are output from the [USB] con-

nector and the [ACC] socket.

• OFF (OPEN): The received audio is output regard-

less of the squelch state.

• ON: The received audio is output depending

on the squelch state (open or closed).

• The beep tones and the voice synthesizer an-

nouncements are not sent.

• The received audio output level cannot be adjusted

with the [AF] control.

ACC/USB Output Select (Default: AF)

Connectors > ACC/USB Output Select (ACC/USB Out-

put Select)

Select whether to use the [USB] connector and the

[ACC] socket for a usual received audio, or to use the

IF output for [DRM (Digital Radio Mondiale)].

• AF: The received audio is output from the [ACC] sock-

et and the [USB] connector.

• IF: The received signal is converted to an IF signal,

and then output.

ACC/USB AF Level (Default: 50%)

Connectors > ACC/USB AF Level (ACC/USB AF Lev-

el)

Enter the audio output level at the [ACC] socket and the

[USB] connector to between 0% and 100%.

ACC/USB IF Level (Default: 50%)

Connectors > ACC/USB IF Level (ACC/USB IF Level)

Set the IF output level at the [ACC] socket and the

[USB] connector to between 0% and 100%.

ACC MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Connectors > ACC MOD Level (ACC MOD Level)

Set the input modulation level at the [ACC] socket to

between 0% and 100%.

DATA MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Connectors > DATA MOD Level (DATA MOD Level)

Set the input modulation level at the [DATA] jack to be-

tween 0% and 100%.

USB MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Connectors > USB MOD Level (USB MOD Level)

Set the input modulation level of the [USB] connector to

between 0% and 100%.

DATA OFF MOD (Default: MIC, ACC)

Connectors > DATA OFF MOD (DATA OFF MOD)

Select the desired connector(s) for data modulation in-

put in the data OFF mode.

• MIC: Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC: Use the signals from [ACC] (pin 11).

• MIC, ACC: Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC] (pin

11).

• USB: Use the signals from [USB].

DATA MOD (Default: ACC)

Connectors > DATA MOD (DATA MOD)

Select the desired connector(s) for data modulation in-

put in the data mode.

• MIC: Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC: Use the signals from [ACC] (pin 11).

• MIC, ACC: Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC] (pin

11).

• USB: Use the signals from [USB].

VOICE (Default: OFF)

Connectors > External Keypad > VOICE (External Key-

pad (VOICE))

Select whether or not to enable transmitting voice

memory contents using the external keypad.

• OFF: The external keypad is disabled.

• ON: Transmits the desired voice memory contents in

T1 to T4 during SSB, AM, FM, DV operation.

Connectors Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-25

Previous view

KEYER (Default: OFF)

Connectors > External Keypad > KEYER (External

Keypad (KEYER))

Select whether or not to enable transmitting keyer

memory contents using the external keypad.

• OFF: The external keypad is disabled.

• ON: Transmits the desired keyer memory contents in

M1 to M4 during CW mode operation.

RTTY (Default: OFF)

Connectors > External Keypad > RTTY (External Key-

pad (RTTY))

Select whether or not to enable transmitting RTTY

memory contents using the external keypad.

• OFF: The external keypad is disabled.

• ON: Transmits the desired RTTY memory contents

in RT1 to RT4 during RTTY mode operation.

CI-V Baud Rate (Default: Auto)

Connectors > CI-V > CI-V Baud Rate (CI-V Baud

Rate)

Set the CI-V data transfer speed to 300, 1200, 4800,

9600, 19200 bps or Auto.

When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automatically

set according to the data rate of the controller.

CI-V Address (Default: 88h)

Connectors > CI-V > CI-V Address (CI-V Address)

To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its

own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code.

The IC-7100’s default address is 88h.

When 2 or more IC-7100s are controlled through a PC

at the same time, set a different address for each de-

vice between 01h and DFh (hexadecimal).

CI-V Transceive (Default: ON)

Connectors > CI-V > CI-V Transceive (CI-V Trans-

ceive)

Turn the CI-V Transceive function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: When you change a setting on the transceiver,

the same change is automatically set on other

connected transceivers or receivers, and vice

versa.

USB2 Function (Default: OFF)

Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > USB2 Function

(USB2 Function)

Two COM port numbers are assigned to the [USB] con-

nector. One of them is used for cloning and CI-V opera-

tion (USB1).

Select the use of the other COM port (USB2).

• OFF: Does not use the COM port (USB2).

• RTTY: Decode used for RTTY decoded signal out-

put.

• DV Data: Used for low-speed data input and output.

• If DATA1 Function is set to “GPS,” and GPS Out

is set to “DATA1USB2,” the COM port (USB2)

will be used for low-speed data input and GPS

data output.

DATA1 Function (Default: GPS)

Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > DATA1 Function

(DATA1 Function)

Select the use of the [DATA1] jack.

• OFF: Does not use the [DATA1] jack.

• RTTY: Decode used for RTTY decoded signal out-

put.

• DV Data: Used for low-speed data input and output.

• GPS: Used for the GPS receiver connection for

position data input.

NOTE:

You cannot set “DV Data” to both “USB2 Function”

and “DATA1 Function.”

If you select “DV Data” for one of them when “DV

Data” is set to the other one, the previously set item

will be to “OFF.”

GPS Out (Default: OFF)

Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > GPS Out (GPS

Out)

Select whether or not to output the data to the COM

port (USB2) when data is input from a GPS receiver

through the [DATA1] jack.

NOTE:

You can use this function only when “OFF” or “DV

Data” is selected as the “USB2 Function” option, and

“GPS” is selected as the “DATA1 Function” option.

• OFF: Turns OFF the function.

• DATA1 USB2: Outputs the GPS data to the COM

port (USB2).

Connectors Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-26

Previous view

DV Data/GPS Out Baud (Default: 4800)

Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > DV Data/GPS

Out Baud (DV Data/GPS Out Baud)

Set the DV or GPS data transfer speed to 4800 or 9600

bps.

RTTY Decode Baud (Default: 9600)

Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > RTTY Decode

Baud (RTTY Decode Baud)

Set the RTTY decode monitor speed to 300, 1200,

4800, 9600 or 19200 bps.

VSEND Select (Default: VHF/UHF)

Connectors > VSEND Select (VSEND Select)

Select the band to use for the [ACC] socket’s pin 7

(VSEND usage) and pin 3 (HSEND usage).

• OFF: VSEND is not used.

HSEND is used for all bands.

• UHF: VSEND is used for the 430 MHz band.

HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz and

144 MHz bands.

• VHF/UHF: VSEND is used for the 144 MHz and 430

MHz bands.

HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz

bands.

9600bps Mode (Default: OFF)

Connectors > 9600bps Mode (9600bps Mode)

Select whether to allow data transmission at 9600 bps,

or not on the [DATA2] socket.

• OFF: Disables data transmission at 9600 bps on the

[DATA2] socket. This is used for regular audio or

slower data transmission only.

• ON: Enables data transmission at 9600 bps on the

[DATA2] socket.

Connectors Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-27

Previous view

Display Contrast (Default: 25%)

Display > LCD Contrast (LCD Contrast)

Set the display contrast level to between 0% and

100%.

LCD Backlight (Default: 50%)

Display > LCD Backlight (LCD Backlight)

Set the LCD backlight brightness to between 0% and

100%.

Key Backlight (Default: 50%)

Display > Key Backlight (Key Backlight)

Set the key backlight brightness to between 0% and

100%.

Meter Peak Hold (Default: ON)

Display > Meter Peak Hold (Meter Peak Hold)

Turn the Meter Peak Hold function ON or OFF.

This function displays the peak level of a received sig-

nal strength or the output power for approximately 0.5

seconds.

BW Popup (PBT) (Default: ON)

Display > BW Popup (PBT) (BW Popup (PBT))

Select whether or not to display the PBT shift value

while rotating the TWIN-PBT control.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Displays the PBT shift value.

BW Popup (FIL) (Default: ON)

Display > BW Popup (FIL) (BW Popup (FIL))

Select whether or not to display the IF ﬁ lter width and

shift value when the IF ﬁ lter is switched by touching the

ﬁ lter icon.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• ON: Displays the IF ﬁ lter width and shift value.

RX Call Sign Display (Default: Auto)

Display > RX Call Sign Display (RX Call Sign Display)

Select whether or not to display the call sign of the call-

er station when a call is received.

• OFF: Does not display the caller station’s

call sign.

• Auto: The caller station’s call sign auto-

matically scrolls once, and then dis-

appears.

• Auto (RX Hold): The caller station’s call sign automat-

ically scrolls once, and then remains

on the display until the signal disap-

pears.

NOTE:

When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected, and if

the call sign and name of the caller station is pro-

grammed in your memory, the programmed name is

displayed after showing the call sign.

RX Message Display (Default: Auto)

Display > RX Message Display (RX Message Display)

Select whether or not to display and scroll a received

message.

• OFF: Does not display the message.

To check the message, touch [CD] on the “D-1”

screen (Menu D1) to display the call record.

• Auto: Automatically displays and scrolls the mes-

sage.

The message is automatically displayed every

30 seconds until their signal disappears.

NOTE:

When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected in RX

Call Sign Display, the message is displayed after dis-

playing the caller station’s call sign.

Reply Position Display (Default: ON)

Display > Reply Position Display (Reply Position Dis-

play)

Select whether or not to display the caller’s position

data when the data is included in the Auto Replay sig-

nal.

• OFF: Does not display the caller’s position data.

• ON: Automatically displays the caller’s position data.

Display Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-28

Previous view

TX Call Sign Display (Default: Your Call Sign)

Display > TX Call Sign Display (TX Call Sign Display)

Select whether or not to display your own or the desti-

nation station’s call sign while transmitting.

• OFF: Does not display the call sign.

• Your Call Sign: Displays and scrolls the destination’s

call sign.

When the called station’s call sign and

name are programmed into memory,

the transceiver shows the name after

the call sign in any DV mode except

for the DR mode.

• My Call Sign: Displays and scrolls your own call

sign.

Scroll Speed (Default: Fast)

Display > Scroll Speed (Scroll Speed)

This item sets the scrolling speed of the message, call

sign, or other text, that is displayed on the transceiver's

LCD.

• Slow: The speed is set to slow.

• Fast: The speed is set to fast.

VOICE TX Name Display (Default: ON)

Display > VOICE TX Name Display (VOICE TX Name

Display)

Select whether or not to display the voice TX memory

name on the “Voice TX” display.

• OFF: Does not display the voice TX memory name.

• ON: Displays voice TX memory name.

KEYER Memory Display (Default: ON)

Display > KEYER Memory Display (KEYER Memory

Display)

Select whether or not to display the keyer memory con-

tents on the “Keyer Send” display.

• OFF: Does not display the keyer memory contents.

• OFF: Displays keyer memory contents.

Opening Message (Default: ON)

Display > Opening Message (Opening Message)

Select the opening message that is displayed on the

LCD at power ON.

• OFF: Opening message display is skipped.

• ON: Icom logo, MY call sign and the product model

(“IC-7100”)* are displayed at power ON.

*Depending on the version.

Power ON Check (Default: ON)

Display > Power ON Check (Power ON Check)

Select whether or not to display the RF Power, RIT,

Auto Power OFF condition when the transceiver is ac-

tivated.

When the RIT or Auto Power OFF is set to OFF, no

display is shown.

• OFF: Does not display the RF Power, RIT, Auto Power

OFF condition.

• ON: Displays the RF Power, RIT, Auto Power OFF

condition.

Display Language (Default: English)

Display > Display Language (Display Language)

This item will appear only when “Japanese” is se-

lected in System Language. See page ??-??

“Choose your language carefully” about setting

cautions.

Set the screen display language type in the DR mode

or Menu mode to English or Japanese.

System Language (Default: English)

Display > System Language (System Language)

Set the system language of the transceiver to English

or Japanese.

• English: The system language of the transceiver is

English.

- Only alphabetical characters (A to Z, a to

z, 0 to 9) and symbols (! " # $ % & ' ( ) * +

, - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~) can be

displayed.

If Japanese characters (Kanji, Hiragana

and Katakana) are included, the LCD

shows “=” or “_” instead of that character.

In this case, you can only delete “=” or “_”

in the transceiver's edit mode.

- The Display Language item will be hid-

den.

• Japanese: The system language of the transceiver is

Japanese.

Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters,

and the 2-bytes symbols can be displayed

on the LCD.

To display such characters in the DR mode

or Menu mode, Display Language must be

set to “Japanese.”

Display Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-29

Previous view

Choose your language carefully

When the system language of the transceiver is set to Japanese, the IC-

7100 has the capability to display both English and Japanese characters.

HOWEVER, if you select Japanese as the display language (p. ??-??), all

menu items throughout the IC-7100 system will be displayed in only Japa-

nese characters. There will be no English item names. Unless you are ﬂ uent

in reading Japanese characters, use this feature with extreme caution.

If you change the IC-7100’s language to Japanese, and can’t understand

the menu system in the new setting, you will have to change the language

back to English in “Display Language” or “System Language” (this item),

or by doing a partial reset of the IC-7100 CPU. A partial reset will not clear

your call sign databases.

To do a partial reset of the CPU, do the following steps:

1. Push

SET

2. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the bottom item, and then touch it.

3. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the bottom item, and then touch it.

4. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the upper item, and then touch it.

5. The dialog appears. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the upper option, and then

push touch it.

- The transceiver displays “PARTIAL RESET,” then the partial reset is

completed.

Display Set mode (Continued)

17 SET MODE

17-30

Previous view

DATE

Time Set > Date/Time > DATE (DATE)

Manually set the date to between 2000/01/01 and

2099/12/31.

TIME

Time Set > Date/Time > TIME (TIME)

Manually set the time that is displayed on the right hand

corner of the screen to between 0:00 and 23:59.

The time is displayed in the 24 hour format.

GPS Time correct (Default: Auto)

Time Set > GPS Time Correct (GPS Time Correct)

Select whether or not the time data is automatically

corrected by a received GPS sentence.

• OFF: The time data is not automatically corrected.

• Auto: The time data is automatically corrected.

UTC Offset (Default: ±9:00)

Time Set > UTC Offset (UTC Offset)

Set the time difference between UTC (Universal Time

Coordinated) and the local time to between –14:00 and

+14:00 in 00:05 steps.

Clock Display (Default: Local)

Time Set > Clock Display (Clock Display)

Set the clock display mode.

• Local: Displays the local time.

• UTC: Displays the UTC (Universal Time Coordinat-

ed).

Auto Power OFF (Default: OFF)

Time Set > Auto Power OFF (Auto Power OFF)

This function automatically turns OFF the power after

no operation has not been performed for the prepro-

grammed time.

The “Auto Power OFF” pops up in 10 seconds before

the transceiver automatically turns OFF, and a beep

sounds. If an operation is made within the 10 seconds,

the timer restarts.

• OFF: Turns the function OFF.

• 30 to 120 min: Select the desired Auto Power OFF

time between 30, 60, 90 and 120 min-

utes. The power automatically turns

OFF after no operation is made for the

specified time period.

NOTE:

The auto power OFF timer activates each time the

transceiver is turned ON. To deactivate the timer, se-

lect OFF.

Time Set Set mode

17 SET MODE

17-31

Previous view

Version

Others > Information > Version (VERSION)

Shows the transceiver ﬁ rmware’s version number.

Clone Mode

Others > Clone > Clone Mode

Select to read or write the CS-7100 data from or to the

PC, and/or to receive data from a Master transceiver.

See page ??-?? for details.

Clone Master Mode

Others > Clone > Clone Master Mode

Select to write your IC-7100 (Master) data to another

IC-7100 (Sub).

See page ??-?? for details.

Touch Screen Calibration

Others > Touch Screen Calibration

Touch to adjust the touch screen.

See page ??-?? for details.

Partial Reset

Others > Reset > Partial Reset

A Partial reset resets operating settings to their default

values (VFO frequency, VFO settings, menu contents)

without clearing the items below:

See page ??-?? for details.

All Reset

Others > Reset > All Reset

Reset the CPU, if the internal CPU malfunctions due to

static electricity, and so on. All reset clears all program-

ming and returns all settings to their factory defaults

(including the programmed data you purchased).

Therefore, after the All resetting, you cannot use the

transceiver in the DR mode until reprogramming the

repeater list.

See page ??-?? for details.

Recommend! ✓

Before the All resetting, we recommend you save the

programmed data you purchased onto an SD card.

See page ??-?? for details.

Others Set mode

ICOM orporated 339300 HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver User Manual manual draft ALL

ICOM Incorporated HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver manual draft ALL

User Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation